Universal Access Platform User Guide - xLEC.us - … · · 2002-07-31ii Universal Access Platform User Guide ... Using This Document 975-870-200-02, Revision 02 ... UAP SYSTEM OVERVIEW

™975-870-200-028¨

Section 975-870-200-02

PG-FLEXPLUS

UNIVERSAL ACCESS PLATFORM

USER GUIDE

SOFTWARE VERSION 1.0.0

975-870-200-02, Revision 02

ii Universal Access Platform User Guide

Revision History of This Manual

©Copyright 2000 PairGain Technologies, Inc.

PairGain is a registered trademarks, and PG-FlexPlus, The Power Behind DSL Access and the PairGain logo design are trademarks of PairGain Technologies, Inc. No right, license, or interest to such trademarks is granted hereunder, and you agree that you shall assert no such right, license, or interest with respect to such trademarks. All other product names mentioned in this document are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Information contained in this document is company private to PairGain Technologies, Inc. and shall not be modified, used, copied, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part without the written consent of PairGain.

Information furnished by PairGain Technologies is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by PairGain Technologies for its use, nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of PairGain Technologies. PairGain Technologies reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice.

Revision Release Date Revisions Made

02 July 27, 2000 Update per software release to support the following features:ANDA WebView

Multiple IDLC GroupsEnhanced GR-303 cross connection support

DS3 protection switching

Single DS1 modules support both sides of a connectionSingle DS3 modules support both sides of a connection

28 DS1s allowed on each DS3 module

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Using This Document

Universal Access Platform User Guide iii

USING THIS DOCUMENT

The following notice icons are used throughout this guide:

The note icon indicates information about special circumstances.

The information note icon alerts you to important features or instructions.

The caution icon alerts you to risk of personal injury, system damage, or loss of data.

Using This Document 975-870-200-02, Revision 02

iv Universal Access Platform User Guide

Table of Contents 975-870-200-02, Revision 02

Universal Access Platform User Guide v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

New Features in Release 1.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Notice Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Bellcore Documents:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

ISO Documents: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

UAP SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

GR-303 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

UAP Configuration and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Monitoring Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 6

Monitoring Link Performance ................................................................................................................... 7

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Co-location Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Leased-line Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Key Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 10

Rear Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 12

Plug-in Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

DS1 Line Cards ....................................................................................................................................... 14

DS3 Modules ........................................................................................................................................... 14

CPU Cards ............................................................................................................................................... 15

Optional DS1 Protection Switches .......................................................................................................... 18

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Table of Contents

vi Universal Access Platform User Guide

1:4 DS1 Protection Switch ...................................................................................................................... 19

1:8 DS1 Protection Switch ...................................................................................................................... 21

Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chassis Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

DS1 Line Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

DS3 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

CPU Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

DS1 Protection Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

INSTALLING THE UAP

Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Step 1: Select and Prepare the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Step 2: Set Up the UAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unpacking the UAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Gathering the Installation Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Rack-Mounting the UAP and Optional DS1 Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Step 3: Install the Plug-in Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Step 4: Make Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting to DS1 Facility Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting the UAP Directly to a DSX Jack Panel .............................................................................. 34

Connecting the UAP via the 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch....................................................................... 35

Connecting the UAP via the 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch....................................................................... 39

Connector Pin Locations and Pinouts ..................................................................................................... 42

Connecting to a DS3 Cross-Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting DS3 Modules for Standby Protection.................................................................................. 47

Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Verifying Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Checking CPU Module and UAP Status ................................................................................................ 49

Checking DS1 and DS3 Module Status .................................................................................................. 53

Checking DS1 Protection Switch Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

1:4 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs............................................................................................................ 55

1:8 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs............................................................................................................ 55

Step 6: Make External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55


Universal Access Platform User Guide vii

Connecting the UAP for Configuration and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Connecting to the UAP Directly via a Local Terminal .......................................................................... 58

Connecting to the UAP via an Analog Modem ...................................................................................... 59

Connecting to the UAP via the Network Management LAN ................................................................ 61

Connecting the UAP to Non-Traffic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Connecting the Alarm Output Relay Box............................................................................................... 62

Connecting the External Clock Source ................................................................................................... 64

Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Ethernet Connectivity Issues for Host Software Release 1.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Configuring Ethernet Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

GETTING STARTED

Key Tips and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Preparing theUAP for Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Selecting a Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Logging on to the Craft Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Logging on as TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Accessing ANDA WebView. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Configuration Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

USING THE CRAFT INTERFACE

TO MANAGE THE

UAP

Logging on and Navigating the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Logging on to the Craft Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Navigating the Craft Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Changing the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Adding and Editing User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Deleting User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84


viii Universal Access Platform User Guide

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Unassigning Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Configuring System Information Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Viewing System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Assigning a Name to the UAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Viewing the Shelf IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Setting the Inactivity Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Deleting IDLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Viewing CRV Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Viewing Current IDLC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Viewing IDLC Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Configuring Clocking Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Provisioning Data Transmission Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Provisioning DS1 and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Provisioning DS3 Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Creating DS1s for a DS3 Module ........................................................................................................... 96

Changing the Performance Registers ...................................................................................................... 97

Configuring DS0 Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)............................................................................................... 101

Deleting DS0s, DS1s, and DS3s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Deleting DS0 Channels ......................................................................................................................... 102

Deleting DS1 or DS3 Ports ................................................................................................................... 103

Removing Unwanted DS1s, DS3s, or DS0s from the Database .......................................................... 103

Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Provisioning DS0 Cross Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Provisioning DS1 Cross Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Viewing Existing Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Deleting Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Configuring Protection Switching Using the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Configuring DS1 Protection Switchingwith a Single DS1 Protection Switch................................................................................................................. 108

Configuring DS1 Protection Switchingwith Multiple 1:4 DS1 Protection Switches....................................................................................................... 109

Unassigning Protection Boards ..............................................................................................................113

Editing DS1 Protection Switching Assignments....................................................................................114


Universal Access Platform User Guide ix

Switching to and Restoring from Protection Mode ...............................................................................115

Manually Switching a Board to Protected Mode...................................................................................115

Restoring a Board from Protection Mode..............................................................................................116

Configuring the UAP for DS3 Protection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Editing DS3 Protection Switching Assignments....................................................................................118

Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Enabling and Disabling Power Supply Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Enabling and Disabling Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Viewing Current Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Viewing History Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Clearing History Alarms........................................................................................................................ 121

Configuring External Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Changing External Alarm Assignments ................................................................................................ 123

Cutting off the Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Viewing DS1 Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Viewing DS3 Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Resetting the Performance Monitor ...................................................................................................... 125

Setting Loopbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Deactivating Loopbacks ........................................................................................................................ 126

Viewing Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Viewing TDM Backplane Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Viewing Voice Channel Call Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Viewing System CRV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

USING THE TL1 MESSAGING

INTERFACE TO MANAGE THE

UAP

Logging on as TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

TL1 Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

TL1 Verbs .............................................................................................................................................. 131

TL1 TIDs ............................................................................................................................................... 131

TL1 AIDs............................................................................................................................................... 131


x Universal Access Platform User Guide

TL1 CTAGs ........................................................................................................................................... 132

TL1 GENBLOCKs ................................................................................................................................ 132

TL1 OPTIONS....................................................................................................................................... 132

Comments Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Managing User Accounts Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Displaying Active User Accounts ......................................................................................................... 134

Adding a New User Account ................................................................................................................ 135

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Displaying an Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Configuring System Information Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Assigning a Name to the UAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Assigning the Shelf IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Configuring Clocking Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Provisioning Data Transmission Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Managing Cross Connections Using the TL1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Managing Alarms Using the TL1 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Monitoring Performance Using the TL1 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

TL1 Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Resource Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

System Administration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Service Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Alarm Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Alarm Condition Types.......................................................................................................................... 181

Performance Monitoring Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

USING ANDA WEBVIEW

TO MANAGE THE

UAP

Logging on to ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Navigating the WebView Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Using Standard WebView Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Edit (pencil) Icon ................................................................................................................................... 190


Universal Access Platform User Guide xi

View (magnifying glass) Icon ............................................................................................................... 191

Delete (trash can) Icon .......................................................................................................................... 191

Tabs ........................................................................................................................................................ 191

Save and Cancel Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 192

Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

WebView Quick Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Changing the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Adding and Editing User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Deleting User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Viewing CPU and Database Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Viewing Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Deleting Digital Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Viewing IDLC Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Viewing the CRV List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Viewing an IG Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configuring Clocking Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Provisioning Data Transmission Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Provisioning DS1 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Deleting DS1 Provisioning.................................................................................................................... 220

Provisioning DS0s for DS1 Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Deleting DS0s on DS1 Ports ................................................................................................................. 223

Provisioning DS3 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Provisioning DS1 Ports for DS3 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Provisioning DS0s for DS1s Assigned to DS3 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Deleting DS0s on DS1 Ports ................................................................................................................. 228

Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Creating DS0 Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Deleting DS0 Cross Connections .......................................................................................................... 230

Creating DS1 Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Deleting DS1 Cross Connections .......................................................................................................... 232

Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233


xii Universal Access Platform User Guide

Configuring 1-to-N DS1 Protection Switchingwith a Single 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Configuring 1-plus-1 DS3 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Performing Manual Protection Switchovers and Restores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Performing Manual Protection Switchovers ......................................................................................... 236

Performing Manual Protection Restores ............................................................................................... 236

Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Viewing Active Alarms by Alarm Severity .......................................................................................... 238

Viewing Active or History Alarms by Slot Number ............................................................................ 239

Enabling and Disabling Fan and Power Supply Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Configuring External Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Monitoring DS1 Link Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Monitoring DS3 Link Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Setting DS3 Performance Monitoring Alert Thresholds ...................................................................... 247

Appendix A: Troubleshooting and Technical Support___________________________ 251

Troubleshooting Problems with Plug-in Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Where to go for Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Advance Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

FCC Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Appendix B: Maintaining the UAP ____________________________________________________________________ 257

Installation and Replacement Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Performing Downloads and Uploads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Downloading Upgrades to CPU and Application Modules.................................................................. 260

Uploading the Persistent Database ........................................................................................................ 261

Managing CPU Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Removing and Replacing CPU or Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262


Universal Access Platform User Guide xiii

Replacing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Replacing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

GLOSSARY


xiv Universal Access Platform User Guide

Universal Access Platform User Guide xv

About this Guide

This guide describes the Universal Access Platform (UAP) and tells you how to install, cable, power up, manage, and troubleshoot the unit. It is intended for personnel responsible for performing these tasks.

Document Overview The information in this guide is organized as follows:

Chapter 1: UAP System Overview describes the features and key benefits of the UAPTM, discusses applications for the product, and lists system specifications.

Chapter 2: Installing the UAP tells you how to install and cable the UAP.

Chapter 3: Getting Started tells you how to prepare the UAP for management, describes how to select a management interface, and outlines the configuration process for the UAP.

Chapter 4: Using the Craft Interface to Manage the UAP tells you how to use the Craft Interface to manage the UAP.

Chapter 5: Using the TL1 Messaging Interface to Manage the UAP tells you how to use the TL1 messaging interface to manage the UAP.

Chapter 6: Using ANDA WebView to Manage the UAP tells you how to use ANDA WebView to manage the UAP.

Appendix A: Troubleshooting and Technical Support outlines a course of action to take when you encounter problems with UAP plug-in modules and tells you how to obtain technical support from ANDA Networks.

Appendix B: Maintaining the UAP tells you how to perform standard UAP maintenance procedures including performing downloads and uploads and cleaning up a corrupted persistent database.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Document Overview

xvi Universal Access Platform User Guide

New Features in Release 1.0.0Release 1.0.0 supports the following new features:

◆ ANDA WebView

ANDA WebView is a web-based management interface that allows you to configure and manage the UAP remotely using a standard web browser.

◆ Multiple IDLC Groups

The UAP now supports three IDLC groups (IGs).

◆ Enhanced GR-303 cross connection support

The UAP now supports both voice and data cross connections.

◆ DS3 protection switching

The UAP now supports “non-intrusive” DS3 protection switching. Since the signal from the cross-connect is not routed to the standby module via the active module, no service outage occurs when the active module is being replaced.

◆ Single DS1 modules support both sides of a connection

You can now configure a single DS1 module with both a line-side connection and a network-side connection.

◆ Single DS3 modules support both sides of a connection

You can now configure a single DS3 module with both a line-side connection (CPE support) and a network-side connection.

◆ 28 DS1s allowed on each DS3 module

You can now create up to 28 DS1s for each DS3 module. Host software release 0.6.0 allowed only 12 DS1s for each DS3 module.

Text Conventions 975-870-200-02, Revision 02

Universal Access Platform User Guide xvii

Text Conventions Table 1 lists conventions that are used throughout this guide.

Notice Icons The following notice icons are used throughout this guide:

The information note icon alerts you to important features or instructions.

CAUTION: The caution icon alerts you to risk of personal injury, system damage, or loss of data.

WARNING: The warning icon alerts you to risk of severe personal injury.

Related Documentation

The following standard documents contain reference information related to the UAP.

Bellcore Documents:

FR-64 LATA Switching Systems Generic Requirements (LSSGR), 1998 Edition, Issue 98, February 1998

FR-440 Transport System Generic Requirements (TSGR), Issue 1998, September 1998

FR-2063 Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Family of Require-ments, Issue 99, January 199

GR-63 Bellcore, GR-63-CORE, Issue 1, October 1995, “Network Equip-ment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protec-tion”

Table 1 Text Conventions

Convention Description

Text that you enter

This typeface represents text that you enter on the console.

Screen display text

This typeface represents text that appears on the console

Words in boldface type Bold text denotes key features.

Card, board, module The terms card, board, and module are used interchangeably in this guide. For example, the terms DS1 card, DS1 board, and DS1 module all refer to the same piece of hardware.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Related Documentation

xviii Universal Access Platform User Guide

GR-303 Bellcore, GR-303-CORE Issue 2, “IDLC Generic Requirements, Objectives, and Interface,” December 1998, and the associated Issues List Report: GR-303-ILR Issue 2A, December 1998

Bellcore, GR-303-IMD, IDLC System Generic Operations Inter-face (formerly TR-TSY-000303 Supplement 3), Issue 1, Decem-ber 1998

GR-1089 Bellcore, GR-1089-CORE, Issue 2, December 1997, “Electromag-netic Compatibility and Electrical Safety—Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment”

GR-2833 Bellcore, GR-2833 Issue 3, Revision 1, “Generic Operations Inter-faces Using OSI Tools: Information Model for IDLC and FITL Systems”, and the associated Issues List Report: GR-2833-ILR Issue 3B, December 1997

GR-2905 Bellcore, GR-2905-CORE, Issue 2, October 1997, “Generic Requirements for EML Applications for Management of IDLC Systems”, and the associated Issues List Report: GR-2905-ILR Issue 2A, October 1997

TR-08 Bellcore, TR-TSY-000008, Digital Interface Between The AN96 Digital Loop Carrier System and a local Digital Switch, #TR-TSY-000008, Issue 2, August 1987.

TR-57 Bellcore, TR-57, Issue 2, January 1993, “Functional Criteria for Digital Loop Carrier Systems”

TR-199 Bellcore, TR-NWT-000199, OTGR Operations Application Mes-sages - Memory Administration Messages, Issue 2,December 1992, (Section 12.2 of OTGR).

TR-815 Bellcore, TR-TSY-000815, OTGR' Network Element (NE) Mem-ory Administration - NE Operations Security, Issue 1, November 1989 (Section 2.3 of OTGR)

TR-827 Bellcore, TR-TSY-000827, OTGR' Operations Application Mes-sages - Generic Operations Interfaces - Non-OSI Communications Architecture. # TR-TSY-000827 Issue 1, November 1988 (Section 11.1 of OTGR)

TR-831 Bellcore, TR-TSY-000831, OTGR' Operations Application Mes-sages - Language for Operations Application Messages Issue 3, July 1993 (Section 12.1 of OTGR)

TR-833 Bellcore, TR-NWT-000833, OTGR: Operations Application Mes-sages - Network Maintenance: Network Element and Transport Surveillance Messages, #TR-NWT-000833, Issue 5, Revision 1, April 1993, (Section 12.3 of OTGR).

Related Documentation 975-870-200-02, Revision 02

Universal Access Platform User Guide xix

TR-835 Bellcore, TR-TSY-000835, OTGR: Operations Application Mes-sages - Network Element Security Parameter Administration Mes-sages, Issue 3, January 1993, (Section 12.5 of OTGR)

TR-1093 Bellcore, TA-NWT-001093, Generic State Requirements for Managing Network Elements Issue 2, December 1991

ISO Documents:

ISO/IEC 8208 1990- Information technology - Data communications - X 25 Packet Layer Protocol for Data Terminal Equipment - Amend-ment 3’ Conformance Requirement

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Related Documentation

xx Universal Access Platform User Guide

Universal Access Platform User Guide 1

UAP System Overview

This chapter describes the features and key benefits of the UAP, discusses applications for the product, and lists system specifications. It contains the following sections:

◆ Product Overview

◆ Applications

◆ UAP Leased Line Application

◆ Physical Description

◆ System Specifications

Product Overview The UAP is a next-generation access solution for service providers. Combining multiple network elements, technologies, and services in a single platform, the UAP maximizes existing infrastructure and reduces operational transport cost. You can connect the UAP both to a switch and to transmission equipment for dedicated services.

The 22-slot UAP chassis—equipped for front or rear loading in a 23-inch equipment rack—accommodates the following modules:

◆ CPU modules — The CPU module controls all DS0 cross connections between DS1 and DS3 line cards in the chassis; cross connects DS1s; polls for the operating status of each card; logs and stores alarms; and controls DS1 and DS3 protection schemes. You can install a single CPU module or a redundant pair. Redundant pairs increase reliability and reduce system downtime.

◆ DS1 modules — Each card supports 12 DS1s, and you can configure a single DS1 module with both a line-side (CPE) and a network-side connection.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Product Overview

2 Universal Access Platform User Guide

◆ DS3 modules — Each module supports 1 DS3 carrier interface (28 DS1s), and you can configure a DS3 module with either a line-side (CPE) or network-side connection.

Using the UAP, you can offer maximum flexibility of services in business applications by deploying remote units in co-location or as close to subscribers as is economically possible. By bringing a digital signal close to the subscriber, you increase the service options and bandwidth available to the customer.

The total system cross-connect capacity is 9600 DS0s. When the shelf is loaded with DS1 cards only, each UAP supports up to 240 1.544 Mbps DS1 interfaces, for a maximum of 5760 DS0s.

The UAP time slot and cross-connect functions are equivalent to an electronic digital distribution frame (DDF). The unit provides non-blocking cross-connection of up to 240 DS1 digital links, without the need for demultiplexing, allowing you to set up semi-permanent 64 Kbps transmission paths under software control.

You can cross-connect any time slot on the exchange side with any subscriber time slot on the system. On the distribution side, the UAP supports concentration ratios from 1:1 to 20:1, depending on customer traffic profiles. When equipped with DS1 cards only and using a 3:1 concentration ratio, the UAP supports up to 180 DS1s from subscribers and 60 ports for the switch side.

The UAP is designed for installation in a nominal 23-inch standard equipment rack, conforming to NEBS specifications. You can mount up to three UAPs, a fuse/alarm panel, and three optional 1:4 DS1 protection switches in a seven-foot rack, providing a total of 720 DS1 ports in the rack.

Product Overview 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Figure 1 shows three UAPs installed in a standard seven-foot equipment rack. This configuration supports 720 DS1 ports.

Figure 1 UAPs Installed in an Equipment Rack

RedundancyThe UAP does not require its full compliment of modules in order to function; it can provide service when equipped with one CPU card and one DS1 line card. However this minimal configuration provides no redundancy protection and is typically considered only for partially equipped applications (up to 288 DS0s).

The UAP TMC and EOC channels going toward the GR-303 switch have an integral 1:1 dynamic protection, but you can further minimize service disruptions by adding redundancy protection to the unit in the following ways:

◆ Equip the unit with redundant CPU cards to prevent a single card failure from disrupting the entire system. If the active CPU card malfunctions, the standby CPU card takes over to provide services.

UAP Chassis



◆ Connect the unit to an optional DS1 protection switch to provide 1:n (up to 1:8) DS1 card equipment protection. This feature allows you to defer corrective system maintenance until call traffic levels through the system are low. For details about the DS1 protection switch, see “Optional DS1 Protection Switches” later in this chapter.

◆ Configure DS3 module protection switching so that the DS3 signal will flow to a standby DS3 module if the active DS3 module fails. For details, see “DS3 Standby Protection” later in this chapter.

Figure 2 shows three UAPs installed in a standard seven-foot equipment rack, with 1:4 DS1 protection switches installed for DS1 card protection.

Figure 2 UAPs and DS1 Protection Switches Installed in Equipment Rack

UAP Chassis

1:4 DS1 Protection Switches

Product Overview 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


PowerThe UAP requires -48 V DC power for operation. You apply this input from the office power panel to the system backplane. The backplane then sends power to all the plug-in cards in the system. Each card has its own DC converter that provides power to its internal circuits. Each UAP requires one or two fuses, depending on whether or not you are using a dual-battery feed.

GR-303 ImplementationThe UAP uses Bellcore GR-303 concentration to transport DS1 voice services from a central office voice switch to remote subscribers. It provides the interface between the distribution network and the GR-303 DS1s from the telephone exchange, performing the GR-303 functions internally.

The UAP is capable of interfacing to either the Lucent 5ESS®, or Nortel DMS-100/500® local digital switches, using the GR-303 digital interface as defined by the Bellcore GR-303 specification.

◆ For the GR-303 signaling, the primary and secondary DS1 Feeders carry both EOC and TMC channels, on Time Slot 12 and 24 respectively, for messages between the switch and the UAP. Going towards the GR-303 switch, the same channels are carried on two different DS1s, therefore providing an integral 1:1 dynamic protection for the EOC and TMC channels.

◆ For the connection to the distribution network, the UAP can accept D4 or ESF signaling. You can configure the DS1 interfaces individually as either CPE lines or switch ports. The UAP converts D4 or ESF signaling from DS1 channel banks and/or DLCs to a GR-303 concentrated connection to a digital Class 5 switch.

By implementing GR-303 concentration, the UAP greatly reduces the number of DS1 lines and associated facilities needed to backhaul these services from the point of presence to the central office switch.

Using 3:1 concentration, a single UAP supports multiple full GR-303 interfaces, with each GR-303 Interface Group supporting up to 28 DS1 lines. Any data or special services are cross-connected out before they reach the local digital switch. The UAP also accommodates other voice service concentration levels. For example, a 2:1 concentration serves up to 3830 voice subscribers (160 DS1 lines) via 1920 trunks (80 DS1 switch ports), and a 5:1 concentration, serves up to 4800 subscribers (200 DS1s) via 960 trunks (40 DS1s).

UAP Configuration and ManagementYou can configure, provision, and monitor a single UAP either locally (via a VT100 terminal) or remotely (via telnet or FTP) using the following interfaces:

◆ Craft command line interface (for details see Chapter 4)

◆ TL1 messaging interface (for details see Chapter 5)



◆ ANDA WebViewTM web-based management interface (for details see Chapter 6)

For details about making the external connections that enable you to configure and manage the UAP via these interfaces, see “Connecting the UAP for Configuration and Management” in Chapter 2. All configuration and management connections to the UAP are password-protected to prevent unauthorized access.

Monitoring Alarms

The UAP modules are equipped with light-emitting diode (LED) indicators to provide local alarm and status information. For descriptions of the LEDs on each module or board, see ““Verifying Front Panel LEDs” in Chapter 2.

The UAP features an alarm output relay box to which you can wire external alarms via two-wire dry contacts. Use the alarm outputs on the alarm output relay to connect alarms that will notify the central office of existing alarm conditions. Use the alarm inputs on the alarm output relay box to connect alarms that will notify the UAP of alarm states existing in peripheral equipment. You can also connect the UAP to a local alarm panel.

When an alarm occurs, the CPU card also closes its internal audible and visual alarm relay contacts, thereby activating the external alarm collection system. You can extinguish the audible alarms by pressing the ACO button on the UAP CPU card.

For details about how to monitor alarms using the Craft interface, see “Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface” in Chapter 4. For details about how to monitor alarms using the TL1 interface, see “Alarm Management Commands” in Chapter 5. For details about how to monitor alarms using ANDA WebView, see “Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView” in Chapter 6.

Applications 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Monitoring Link PerformanceUse the DS1 performance monitoring (PM) feature to determine the quality of the DS1 link between the UAP and the remote RT.

The T1 line cards gather performance data for all of their T1 ports and store that data for your retrieval and evaluation. Each card obtains AT&T TR-54016 and ANSI T1.403 statistics, and the system can also direct the far-end equipment to send performance report messages (PRMs) back via the associated T1 lines. You can then view this data and determine if the quality of a T1 line is deteriorating. When desired, you can clear all storage registers on the associated UAP T1 cards.

For details about how to monitor link performance using the Craft interface, see “Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface” in Chapter 4. For details about how to monitor link performance using the TL1 interface, see “Performance Monitoring Commands” in Chapter 5. For details about how to monitor link performance using ANDA WebView, see “Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView” in Chapter 6.

Applications The UAP supports many applications. This section illustrates two GR-303 voice concentration applications that are particularly useful for a CLEC:

◆ Co-location

◆ Leased-line

The key benefits of the UAP in these applications are maximizing the utilization of embedded equipment and lowering operational transport costs.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Applications


Co-location ApplicationIn the co-location application, illustrated in Figure 3, the UAP is co-located with existing equipment, such as channel banks and DLC COTs, at the ILEC central office. An external network management system (typically a PC) connects to the UAP for management and administration.

Figure 3 UAP Co-location Application

Each channel bank or equivalent device connects to multiple voice lines (typically 24). The configuration shown in Figure 3 uses 3:1 concentration to serve 4320 subscriber lines. When a subscriber requests service, the UAP establishes the call connection by cross-connecting a DS0 channel of the associated equipment’s DS1 line to a DS0 channel on a DS1 port connected to the GR-303 switch.

FX/POTS

(D4, ESF)

Leased T1

(D4, ESF)

T1Transport(180 T1s)

ChannelBank

ChannelBank

UAP (3:1 Concentration)

DLCCOT

(GR-303)

60 T1s

FX/POTS

Ethernet Element

Manager

CraftInterfaceTerminal

GR-303Voice Switch

ILEC Central Office

CLEC Central Office

RS-232

Key Features and Benefits 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Leased-line ApplicationIn the leased-line application, shown in Figure 4, the CLEC leases DS1 lines from an ILEC or RBOC. The UAP connects to a GR-303 switch, and then hauls the leased lines back to customer premises equipment (CPEs). As in the co-location application, an external element management system (typically a PC) connects to the UAP for management and administration.

Figure 4 UAP Leased Line Application

Key Features and Benefits

The UAP offers the following key benefits:

◆ Interface with variety of DS1-based digital switches and CPE equipment. The switches include the Nortel DMS-100/500®, Lucent 5ESS®, and other systems that support Bellcore GR-303. On the CPE side, the UAP supports DS1s to PBX, D4 and ESF signaling

◆ Bellcore GR-303 concentration. This feature reduces equipment needed at a point of presence for CPE service backhaul to a central office digital switch.

◆ Single chassis with high-density plug-in cards. The UAP chassis can hold multiple DS1 interface cards, each with 12 DS1 ports. This feature reduces

FX/POTS

T1Transport

T1Transport E & M Lines

CPE 1

RS-232Element

ManagementPC

UAP(3:1 Concentration)

(GR-303)

GR-303Voice Switch

60 T1s

FX/POTS

E & M Lines

CPE 180

Leased T1sfrom RBOC

or ILEC

CLEC Central Office

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Physical Description


inventory, installation and maintenance costs, and eases future system expansion to meet increased demands for service.

◆ Flexibility. The UAP supports voice services, such as POTS, FXS, and CLASS services, in any combination.

◆ Redundancy. The UAP has an optional, 1:n (n=1-4) redundancy on all DS1 ports, and optional 1:1 redundancy on the CPU board, thereby minimizing subscriber service disruptions. All associated TMC and EOC channels also have an integral 1:1 dynamic protection. The redundancy feature prevents a single point of failure from bringing down the entire system and allows you to defer corrective system maintenance until call traffic levels through the system are minimized.

◆ Comprehensive remote management. Standardized management channels replace physical management of copper cross-connections at the main distribution frame and distribution cabinets, significantly prolonging the life of the cables in the plant and minimizing service provisioning visits to the ILEC co-location. An operator at a network operation center (NOC) can access, administer, provision, and maintain the UAP. Remote management allows the NOC operator to obtain and evaluate alarms, DS1 performance data, and other status information quickly for follow-up action.

◆ Modular architecture. Expand gradually from TDM technology to high-bandwidth ATM and SONET technologies. Configure the UAP with just the modules you need, adding new modules as they become available and/or your needs change.

Physical Description The UAP includes the following physical components:

◆ Chassis

◆ Plug-in cards

◆ Optional DS1 Protection Switch (1:4 or 1:8)

◆ Fan tray

The following subsections describe these components.

ChassisThe UAP is housed in a 22-slot cold-rolled steel chassis equipped with brackets on both sides for front or rear mounting in a 23-inch equipment rack.

Front PanelFigure 5 shows a front view of the system chassis.

Physical Description 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Figure 5 Front View of UAP Chassis

As shown in Figure 5, the front panel of the UAP provides access to the following components:

◆ 20 universal card slots, designed to support different types of line cards

◆ 2 controller card slots, designed to support CPU cards only. Slot 11 must contain a CPU card.

◆ If the unit is configured with one CPU card, you must install it in slot 11

◆ If the unit is configured with redundant CPU cards, you must install these cards in slots 11 and 12, and the active card must be in slot 11.

10 Universal Slots

Rack-mountBracket(both sides)

Fan Tray

10 Universal Slots

Standby (Redundant)CPU Card

ActiveCPU Card



Rear PanelYou make all connections to the external facilities from the chassis rear, shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6 Rear View of UAP Chassis

B DC Power Input

A DC Power Input

T1 Line Jacks(50-pin; one per T1

DS1 Protection

(DB-9 Connector)Protection Switch

Alarm In(DB-9

Connector)

Alarm Out(DB-9

Connector)

Primary

(RJ-48)Ethernet

Secondary

(RJ-48)Ethernet

DS3

ConnectorsCoax

Port 1 RecieveTransmit

Port 2 NotUsed

Central OfficeGrounding Terminals

Network Clock OutNetwork Clock In

Cable Management

Alarm Output Relay Box

RS-232 (for future use)



As shown in Figure 6, the rear of the UAP provides access to the following components:

◆ 20 50-pin Telco connectors (line jacks) to connect up to 12 DS1 ports (two pairs per DS1) to each interface card

◆ 18 sets of DS3 coax connectors to connect one DS3 line per interface card and to wire installed DS3 cards for redundancy as desired. You can install DS3 modules in slots 1-10 and 15-22.

◆ 2 DB-9 connectors: ALM IN to connect external audible and visual alarms from the central office and ALM OUT to connect to the alarm output relay box

◆ 2 DB-9 connectors to make External Clock In and Network Clock Out connections

◆ 1 DB-9 (RS-232 serial) reserved for future use

◆ 1 DB-9 (RS-232 serial) connector to connect the UAP to an optional DS1 protection switch

◆ 2 RJ-48 Ethernet connectors (one primary and one secondary) to connect the UAP for remote management via a LAN.

If the active CPU module is installed in slot 11, you must connect to the primary Ethernet connector. If the active CPU module is installed in slot 12, you must connect to the secondary Ethernet connector.

◆ 2 -48V DC power inputs (labeled Power A and Power B) to connect to an alarm/fuse panel or power supply for DC power

◆ 2 central office grounding terminals

Plug-in CardsEach plug-in card has two front-edge ejector handles for easy removal and insertion, The cards slide into their respective slots in the UAP chassis, guided by rails to align the backplane connectors. All cards are keyed to prevent accidental insertion into the wrong chassis slots.

The cards are hot-swappable—you can remove and insert the cards while the UAP is receiving power. If the UAP is not fully populated with plug-in cards, blank panels are supplied for use in the empty slots to maintain electromagnetic (EMC) integrity. The following subsections describe the available plug-in card types.



DS1 Line CardsEach DS1 line card supports 12 DS1 (1.544 Mbps) carrier interfaces. The DS1 line cards perform the following functions:

◆ Nortel DMS-00® and Lucent 5ESS® direct switch interface

◆ Channel Bank interface (D4, ESF)

◆ GR-303 interface

◆ Primary rate integrated (PRI) services digital network (ISDN) transport

◆ 1.544-Mbps transport, framed or unframed (G.703)

◆ Alarm indications for DSX1 module failure or failure of incoming 1.544 Mbps signal

Each DS1 card port has its own framer and transceiver for signal processing, and you can configure all ports for operation individually from the Craft, TL1, or WebView interface via dial-up prior to cutover.

The DS1 cards report alarms to the CPU upon detecting abnormal operating conditions on their ports. These conditions include an incoming loss of signal or loss of frame on any port and a remote (yellow) alarm received on a port from the far end. An alarm is also reported—and a front panel LED illuminated—if the card itself fails. For details about the DS1 line card LEDs, see “Checking DS1 and DS3 Module Status” in Chapter 2.

In addition to reporting alarms, each DS1 line card accumulates and stores detailed performance data for all its ports. You can retrieve this data remotely (via a Telnet session)—using the Craft, TL1, or WebView interface—for evaluation and possible further action.

DS3 ModulesEach DS3 module supports 1 DS3 carrier interface. The DS3 modules perform the following functions:

◆ DS3 trunk and line-side (CPE) transport

◆ Alarm indications for DS3 module failure or failure of incoming signal

Each DS3 module has a single DSX3 interface which supports the DS3 signal speed of 44.736 Mbps and 672 circuits. Each DS3 interface can be configured to handle up to 28 DS1s with 24 DS0s per DS1.

The DS3 modules report alarms to the CPU upon detecting abnormal operating conditions on their ports. These conditions include an incoming loss of signal or loss of frame on any port and a remote (yellow) alarm received on a port from the far end. An alarm is also reported—and a front panel LED illuminated—if the card itself fails. For details about the DS3 module LEDs, see “Checking DS1 Protection Switch Status” in Chapter 2.

In addition to reporting alarms, each DS3 module accumulates and stores detailed performance data for all its ports. You can retrieve this data for



evaluation and possible further action locally or remotely (via Telnet) using the Craft, TL1, or WebView interface.

The DS3 modules also provide signal loopbacks on each port upon request. You can use these loopbacks to test faulty DS3 lines.

DS3 Standby Protection When the UAP is configured for DS3 standby protection, DS3 modules are installed in pairs. The main module is connected to a standby module to provide protection in the event that the main module fails. The DS3 signal coming from the cross-connect is split into two paths: active and standby. In normal operation, the relay connects the signal going to the active DS3 module and disconnects the signal going to the standby DS3 module. If the active module fails, however, the relay disconnects the signal going to the active module and connects the signal going to the standby module. Since the signal from the cross-connect is not routed to the standby module via the active module, no service outage occurs when the active module is being replaced.

For information about how to connect DS3 modules for standby protection, see “Connecting DS3 Modules for Standby Protection” in Chapter 2.

CPU CardsThe UAP can be configured with either a single CPU card or two CPU cards (recommended) for redundancy. In a redundant-CPU chassis, the standby CPU card takes over if the active CPU fails. The CPU card performs the following functions:

◆ Controls all DS0 channel cross-connections between DS1 and DS3 line cards in the chassis.

◆ Cross connects DS1s.

◆ Polls for the current operating status of each card and reports that data to a network management system for follow-up action.

◆ Logs and stores all system alarms and other events by date and time of occurrence, type of alarm, affected system card, and (when applicable) affected port on a DS1 or DS3 interface card.

◆ Provides a network management system agent (via a DB-9 connector on the front panel of the active CPU module) for UAP system administration and maintenance.

◆ Provides an alarm cutoff (ACO) button that enables you to extinguish an external audible alarm.

◆ Provides controls for DS1 and DS3 protection schemes.

A CPU card comes up in standby mode and retrieves system status information to determine its actual state: None, Standby, Active, or Active with Standby. The active CPU card executes the call control functions and updates provision information to the standby CPU card. In normal operation, the standby card executes no operations; it merely accepts provision information from the active



card. If the active CPU card fails, however, the standby card takes over as the active CPU card and executes the call control functions.

Figure 7 illustrates the features of a CPU card.

Figure 7 UAP CPU Card Features

ACO

ACOButton

DB-9Connector

MISCMINMAJ

CRITACTFAIL



Figure 8 shows how the CPU card manages DS0 cross-connections between DS1 interface cards in the UAP system. When the call is terminated or aborted, the switch tells the UAP CPU card to drop the DS0 cross-connection. The TMC channel conveys the call takedown information to the CPU card for that purpose.

When a subscriber goes off-hook to request service, the UAP sends a setup request to the switch over its TMC channel. The switch responds by connecting a DS0 channel of a CPE DS1 port to a DS0 channel on a switch-side DS1 port. This cross-connection establishes a path between the subscriber and the switch. In the example illustrated in Figure 8, the call transmission path is from DS0 channel 1 of CPE DS1 line 1 to DS0 channel 6 of switch DS1 line 2.

Figure 8 Typical DS0 Channel Cross-connection

The UAP supports both dynamic cross connections (GR-303) and “nailed up” logical cross connections.

◆ Dynamic cross connections (GR-303) work as follows: When a CPE subscriber initiates a call, the associated DS1 card cross-connects a DS0 channel of a DS1 port to a DS0 channel of a DS1 port on the switch. Each DS1 card also makes similar cross-connections when additional subscribers initiate calls through the system. The cross-connections remain in effect until the calls are terminated.

◆ “Nailed up” cross connections are the DS0 and DS1 cross connections that you configure manually using the Craft, TL1, or WebView interface.

T1 (1)T1 (2)

TDM BusT1 (3)T1 (4)

T1 (1) VFT1 (2)T1 (3)

To Other CPEsT1 (4)

UAP

DS0 (6)

T1 Card 1

DS0 (1)

T1 Card 2

CPEGR-303Switch

TMCChannel

EOCChannel

DS0 MappingControl

SystemController

Card



Communication Between Active and Standby CPU Cards Channel 0 is reserved to pass the following messages between the active and the standby CPU cards:

◆ Standby up

◆ Acknowledge standby up

◆ Provision information

The standby CPU card sets a five-second timer when it sends the Standby up message. It continues to send the Standby up message until it receives the Acknowledge standby up message from the active CPU card or until it becomes the active card, at which point it cancels the timer.

When the active CPU card receives the Standby up message, it sends both the Acknowledge standby up and the Provision information messages back to the standby CPU card, with one interface group per message. If the provision information is currently being modified on the active card, the active card sends it to the standby card when the modifications are complete.

Optional DS1 Protection SwitchesPositioned between the UAP and the subscriber-side DS1 cross-connect, the DS1 protection switch takes the control signal from the system board and connects to a switch that enables the UAP to switch over to a spare DS1 line card in the event of a card failure. As with the UAP itself, each connector on the DS1 protection switch supports 12 DS1s.

In normal operation, all the DS1 protection switch relays are inactive, thereby providing paths from DS1 inputs to DS1 outputs. DS1 input 1 is connected to DS1 output 1, DS1 input 2 is connected to DS1 output 2, and so on. The spare DS1 in terminated with 100 ohms provided by the DS1 protection switch. If a protected DS1 line card fails, the corresponding DS1 input on the protection switch is routed to the spare DS1, and the termination on the spare is automatically removed.

The UAP supports two optional DS1 protection switches: a 1:4 DS1 protection switch and a 1:8 DS1 protection switch.



1:4 DS1 Protection SwitchThe 1:4 DS1 protection switch provides 1-to-4 protection for DS1 line cards, meaning that each switch supports up to four DS1 line cards. In addition, you can daisy chain two 1:4 DS1 protection switches to provide 1:8 protection.

The 1:4 protection switch has nine interfaces: four inputs to and from the DS1 cross-connect, four outputs to and from the UAP, and one spare (to which you connect the board that will provide the protection). An RS-232 interface provides the communication link between the protection switch and the UAP and between daisy-chained protection switches.

The front of the 1:4 DS1 protection switch features six LEDs, indicating the status of the switch itself and of the four DS1 inputs. The DS1 LEDs illuminate to indicate which, if any, of the four inputs is being switched to the spare DS1. For details about the DS1 protection switch LEDs, see “1:4 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs” in Chapter 2.



Figure 9 shows the rear panel of the 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 9 Rear View of 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch

As shown in Figure 9, the rear panel of the 1:4 DS1 protection switch provides the following features:

◆ 9 50-pin Telco connectors arranged in two rows:

◆ The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the top row are the DS1 inputs that connect to the facility DS1s.

◆ The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the bottom row are the DS1 outputs that connect to the Telco connectors on the UAP rear panel.

◆ The connector labeled SPARE in the bottom row connects to the UAP DS1 line card designated as the spare via the Telco connector on the UAP rear panel.

◆ 5-position power terminal block. You can wire two power sources to provide power protection. Input voltage is -48V DC.

◆ 2 DB-9 RS-232 connectors

◆ The female DB-9 connector receives inputs from the UAP.

◆ The male DB-9 connector outputs to another 1:4 DS1 protection switch, allowing you to daisy chain the switches and provide protection for additional DS1s.

◆ Address configuration dip switch (4-bit) for identifying relay box addresses (1-4). The UAP CPU card addresses each DS1 protection switch by means of the switch settings.

For details about connecting DS1 protection switches, see “Connecting to DS1 Facility Lines” in Chapter 2.

ConfigurationDip Switch

DC PowerTerminal Block

-48V

DC

(A

)

-48V

DC

(B

)

Ret

urn

(A)

Ret

urn

(B)

Gro

und

DS1 InputConnect to Facility DS1s

DS1 OutputConnect to DS1 Interfaces on UAP

1234

1234 SPARE

Connect to UAP for Switching Control

RS-232 IN

(optional) Connect to AdditionalDS1 Protection Switches

RS-232 OUT

Address



1:8 DS1 Protection SwitchThe 1:8 DS1 protection switch provides 1-to-8 protection DS1 line cards, meaning that each switch supports up to eight DS1 line cards. The 1:8 protection switch has 17 interfaces: eight inputs to and from the DS1 cross-connect, eight outputs to and from the UAP, and one spare (to which you connect the board that will provide the protection). An RS-232 interface provides the communication link between the protection switch and the UAP.

The front of the 1:4 DS1 protection switch features six LEDs, indicating the status of the switch itself and of the four DS1 inputs. The DS1 LEDs illuminate to indicate which, if any, of the four inputs is being switched to the spare DS1. For details about the DS1 protection switch LEDs, see “1:8 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs” in Chapter 2.

Figure 10 shows the rear panel of the 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 10 Rear View of 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch


-48V DC (A)

-48V DC (B)

Return (A)

Return (B)

Ground


Address

1 O

UT

2 IN

2 OU

T

3 IN

3 OU

T

4 IN

4 OU

T

5 OU

T

6 IN

6 OU

T

7 IN

7 OU

T

8 IN

8 OU

T

SPA

RE

5 IN

1 IN

Connect IN connectors to patch panelConnect OUT connectors to UAP

Cable Tie Holder

RS-232 IN (to UAP)

S-232 OUT (not used)

Pull out tray to access Telco connectors, power terminal, and dip switches(See detail below)

Detail of 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch Connector Tray (as viewed from above)



As shown in Figure 10, the rear panel of the 1:8 DS1 protection switch provides the following features:

◆ A pull-out tray that accommodates the following:

◆ 17 50-pin Telco connectors.

◆ The connectors labeled 1 IN, 2 IN, 3 IN, 4 IN, 5 IN, 6 IN, 7 IN, and 8 IN are the DS1 inputs that connect to the facility DS1s.

◆ The connectors labeled 1 OUT, 2 OUT, 3 OUT, 4 OUT, 5 OUT, 6 OUT, 7 OUT, and 8 OUT are the DS1 outputs that connect to the Telco connectors on the UAP rear panel.

◆ The connector labeled SPARE connects to the UAP DS1 line card designated as the spare via the Telco connector on the UAP rear panel.

◆ 5-position power terminal block. You can wire two power sources to provide power protection. Input voltage is -48V DC.

◆ 2 DB-9 RS-232 connectors

◆ The female DB-9 connector receives inputs from the UAP.

◆ The male DB-9 connector is unused.

◆ Address configuration dip switch (4-bit) for identifying relay box addresses (1-4). The UAP CPU card addresses each DS1 protection switch by means of the switch settings.

For details about connecting DS1 protection switches, see “Connecting to DS1 Facility Lines” in Chapter 2.

Fan TrayThe UAP is cooled via forced air provided by a removable fan tray featuring three fans. tachometer inputs monitor fan failure, as indicated by decreased fan speed. If the fan speed for any one of the three fans falls below a certain threshold, a visual (Misc) alarm is generated. For details about how to remove and replace the fan tray, see “Replacing the Fan Tray” in Appendix B.

System Specifications 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


System Specifications

This section describes the UAP system specifications.

Chassis SpecificationsTable 1 lists the physical specifications for the UAP chassis.

Table 1 UAP Physical Specifications

Dimensions(H x W x D)

22.75 in (57.8 cm) x 23 in (58.4 cm) x 10 in (25.4 cm)height is 13 RU (rack units)

Weight 70 lb (31.5 kg) (chassis only)

Slots 22 total (2 reserved for CPU cards)

Connectors Telco 50-pin for facility DS1sCoax for facility DS3sDB-9 for Alarm In/Out, Clock In/Out, Management System software interface, andDS1 protection switch connectionsRJ-48 for Ethernet LAN connection

Alarms Minor, major, critical, and ACO state (front visual)Front panel ACO push button

Power Input 250W @ -40.5 to -75 V DC

Cooling Forced air (removable fan tray)

Operating temperature 0 to 45° C

Humidity 5 to 85% non-condensing

Compliance Bellcore:

FR-64FR-440FR-2063GR-63GR-1089

NEBS:

“Network Equipment Building Safety” Level 3

FCC 47, Part 68

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 System Specifications


DS1 Line Card SpecificationsTable 2 lists the specifications for the UAP DS1 line cards.

Table 2 UAP DS1 Line Card Specifications


15.6 in (39.5 cm) x 1.6 in (2 cm) x 9.6 in (24.5 cm)

Weight approximately 10.5 oz (300 g)

Exchange interface 1.544 Mbps per CCITT G.703

Impedance 100 Ohms twisted pair

Interfaces per module 12 x DS1

Redundancy 1:4 protection switching provided via ADC 1:4 DS1 protection switch

Transmit fixed 3.0 Vpk +/-0.4 Vpk

Line build out 4 steps 0-655 ft; 133 ft/step

Signaling/Framing D4/SF, ESF, AMIZCS

Line coding AMI, B8ZS

Zero suppression B8ZS, BIT7, NONE

Channel sequence D1D, D4

Loopback modes Local, remote

Equalization receive 750 mV (10 dB attenuation)

Jitter 138 UI per AT&T Pub 62411/1991 ANSI DS1E1 1.2/88

Cable interface AT&T CB-119

Operating temperature -40° to +65° C


Maximum power consumption

10 W

System Specifications 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


DS3 Module SpecificationsTable 3 lists the specifications for the UAP DS3 modules.

Table 3 UAP DS3 Module Specifications


15.6 in (39.5 cm) x 1.6 in (2 cm) x 9.6 in (24.5 cm)


Nominal line rate 44.736 Mbps per CCITT G.703

Impedance 75 Ohms coax

Interfaces per module 1 x DS3; equivalent to 28 DS1s, providing a total of 672 circuits per card

Redundancy 1:1 protection switching provided via ADC Y-cable connector assembly

GR-303 support ■ DS0, DS1, or DS3 to TDM concentration

■ Up to 500 cross connects

■ Provisioning for up to 2048 CRVs

■ 3 interface groups (IGs)

Transmit fixed Vpmin = 0.36 V corresponding to -1.8 dBm (all 1’s)Vpmax = 0.85 V corresponding to 5.7 dBm (all 1’s)

Line build out 2 steps:< 255 ft> 255 ft ð 450 ft

Signaling/Framing DS3

Line coding B3Zs

Frame format M13, C-bit

Test load impedance 75 Ohms

Loopback modes Local, remote

Equalization receive 45 mV

Jitter 10 UIPP per AT&T Pub 62411/1991 ANSI DS1E1 1.2/88

Cable interface RG59

Operating temperature -40° to +65° C



15 W

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 System Specifications


CPU Card SpecificationsTable 4 lists the specifications for the UAP CPU cards.

DS1 Protection Switch SpecificationsTable 5 lists the specifications for the UAP 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

Table 6 lists the specifications for the UAP 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

Table 4 UAP CPU Card Specifications


15.6 in (39.5 cm) x 1.6 in (2 cm) x 9.6 in (24.5 cm)


Operating temperature -40 to +65° C



10 W

Table 5 UAP DS1 Protection Switch Specifications


3.5 in (8.9 cm) x 23 in (58.4 cm) x 9 in (22.9 cm)



Input Voltage -48V DC

Connectors 9 Telco 50-pin to connect to facility DS1s and to DS1 interfaces on UAPDB-9 for switching connection and to connect to other boxesDC power connector terminal

Table 6 UAP DS1 Protection Switch Specifications


1.75 in (4.45 cm) x 23 in (58.4 cm) x 9 in (22.9 cm)



Input Voltage -48V DC

Connectors 17 Telco 50-pin to connect to facility DS1s and to DS1 interfaces on UAPDB-9 for switching connectionDC power connector terminal


Installing the UAP

This chapter tells you how to install and cable the UAP. It contains the following sections:

◆ Installation Overview

◆ Step 1: Select and Prepare the Installation Site

◆ Step 2: Set Up the UAP

◆ Step 3: Install the Plug-in Modules

◆ Step 4: Make Signal Connections

◆ Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs

◆ Step 6: Make External Connections

◆ Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity

Installation Overview This section provides an overview of the UAP installation process.

To install the UAP, perform these basic steps:

1. Select and prepare the installation site.

2. Set up (unpack and rack-mount) the UAP.

3. Install the plug-in modules.

4. Make signal connections.

5. Connect power and verify front panel LEDs.

6. Make external connections (management, alarms, and clocks).

7. Establish Ethernet connectivity.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 1: Select and Prepare the Installation Site


Step 1: Select and Prepare the Installation Site

Before you choose a setup location for the UAP, be sure to read and follow the environmental requirements defined in Chapter 1. Keep in mind that the unit requires proper ventilation, consider current and future cabling requirements, and address these specific issues:

◆ Maximum recommended operating temperature — The maximum recommended operating temperature for the UAP is 45° C (109.4° F). Determine a suitable operating environment based on this recommendation.

◆ Elevated operating ambient temperature — If the unit is installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating temperature of the rack environment may be greater than the ambient temperature of the room. Keep this in mind when you install the unit.

◆ Reduced air flow — Install the UAP in the rack so that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.

◆ Mechanical loading — Mount the UAP in the rack so as to avoid a potentially hazardous condition due to uneven mechanical loading.

◆ Circuit overloading — Before connecting the UAP to the supply circuit, consider the effect that potential overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.

◆ Reliable Grounding — Maintain reliable grounding for the UAP and all rack-mounted equipment, giving particular attention to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuits.

Step 2: Set Up the UAP

The UAP is delivered to you in a shipping carton, while the plug-in cards are shipped in individual boxes—one module per box. Due to the large size and weight of a fully-configured UAP, ADC recommends that you take the unit to the installation site before unpacking it from the shipping carton.

To avoid potential injury, we recommend that you use a hand lift to move or rack-mount the unit.

Unpacking the UAPTo unpack the UAP, follow these steps:

1. Remove the unit from the shipping carton.

2. Remove all enclosed packing materials and save them in the event that you need to repack the unit for relocation at a later date.

3. Check the contents of the carton against the items listed below and on the packing slip.

◆ UAP chassis

◆ Plug-in modules, as ordered (in individual boxes)

Step 2: Set Up the UAP 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


◆ (optional) DS1 protection switch(es)

◆ cables, as ordered (see Table 7 for cable descriptions)

Part #150-2378-02 (the DB-9 male to female cable used to connect the UAP to the alarm output relay box) is included with the UAP. Other cables are available for purchase from ADC, as outlined in Table 7 later in this chapter.

You are now ready to gather the installation items and rack-mount the UAP, as described in the following sections.

Gathering the Installation ItemsBefore you begin setting up the UAP, gather the items you will need in order to complete the installation:

◆ screwdriver and screws to mount UAP in an equipment rack

◆ anti-static wrist strap

◆ wire wrap gun and 24 or 26 AWG wire (to connect relays to alarm output relay box)

◆ RJ-48 cable

◆ straight-through Ethernet cable to connect the UAP to an Ethernet hub

◆ crossover Ethernet cable to connect the UAP directly to a PC

◆ ASCII/VT100 console terminal or equivalent to perform initial configuration

◆ 50-pin Telco cables to connect the UAP to a DSX jack panel and/or the DS1 protection switch and to connect the DS1 protection switch to a DSX jack panel. (See Table 7.)

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 2: Set Up the UAP


Table 7 lists the appropriate cables available for purchase from ADC.

Table 7 UAP Cables

Part Number Description Use

150-2378-01 DB-9 to DB-9, male to male (straight-through pins), 6 feet

Connects the PROT SW connector on the UAP to the RS-232 IN connector on the 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

Also connects two 1:4 DS1 protection switches to each other via the RS-232 OUT and RS-232 IN connectors.

150-2378-02 DB-9 to DB-9, male to female (straight-through pins), 6 feet

Provided to connect the ALM OUT connector on the UAP to the ALM OUT connector on the alarm output relay box.

You can purchase additional cables to connect the PROT SW connector on the UAP to the RS-232 IN connector on the 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

150-2377-01 2x12 pair shielded cable, 50-pin right angle reversed male to 50-pin straight male, 10 feet

When the UAP is connected to a single 1:4 DS1 protection switch, this cable connects a Telco connector on the UAP to a DS1 OUT connector on the protection switch.

When the UAP is connected to two 1:4 DS1 protection switches, this cable connects to a Y-cable (Part # 150-2377-02), which in turn connects to DS1 OUT connectors on two protection switches.

150-2377-03 2x12 pair shielded cable, 50-pin straight female to stub, 30 feet

Connects a DS1 IN connector on the 1:4 DS1 protection switch to a DSX jack panel.

150-2377-02 2x12 pair shielded cable, Y-cable: 50-pin right angle reversed male to two 50-pin straight males,8 feet/2 feet/2feet

Connects cable #150-2377-01 to DS1 OUT connectors on two 1:4 DS1 protection switches.

150-2377-05 2x12 pair shielded cable, 50-pin right angle reversed male to 50-pin right angle low profile male, 10 feet

Connects Telco connector on UAP to DS1 OUT connector on 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

150-2377-06 2x12 pair shielded cable, 50-pin right angle low profile male to stub, 30 feet

Connects DS1 IN connector on 1:8 DS1 protection switch to DSX jack panel.

150-2377-04 2x12 pair shielded cable, 50-pin right angle reversed male to stub, 30 feet

Connects Telco connector on UAP to DSX jack panel.

Step 3: Install the Plug-in Modules 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Rack-Mounting the UAP and Optional DS1 Protection SwitchTo rack-mount the UAP and optional 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 protection switch(es) into a 23-inch equipment bay, follow these steps:

The rack-mount spacing meets ANSI/EIA-RS-310-C standards.

1. Rack-mount the chassis.

a. Using the recommended hand lift (or a minimum of three installers), raise the UAP to the appropriate installation height.

b. Line up the screw holes on the UAP rack-mounting brackets with the screw holes on the equipment bay or rack.

c. Secure the chassis in the rack by installing screws through the bracket on the UAP into the threaded holes on the equipment bay or rack.

2. (optional) Rack-mount the 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

a. Attach the rack mounting brackets to the DS1 protection switch(es).

b. Position the DS1 protection switch(es) near the UAP unit you want to support.

c. Secure the DS1 protection switch(es) in the chassis by installing screws through the bracket on the protection switch into the threaded holes on the equipment bay or rack.

Step 3: Install the Plug-in Modules

The UAP plug-in modules are high-density boards; you must perform any board insertion very carefully.

You can install line cards in slots 1-10 and 13-22, but you must install CPU cards only in slots 11and 12.

The backplane of the UAP incorporates 3 groups of male plug-type connectors, while the modules feature female socket-type connectors. Use extreme care when inserting plug-in modules—particularly CPU modules—into the shelf, and follow these specific recommendations:

◆ Do not install the DS1 line cards until you have installed the CPU module. If you are replacing a defective active CPU module, do not remove the DS1 boards; the standby CPU will hold the configuration while you replace the active CPU.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 3: Install the Plug-in Modules


◆ When you replace a CPU module, wait 10 minutes before performing any configuration so the currently-active CPU can download all of its information to the new CPU. If you fail to observe this waiting period, you will corrupt the persistent database, in which case you will have to erase the database and rebuild all network configurations, as described under “Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database” in Appendix B.

◆ Do not force a module into or out of the shelf. If you forcibly insert a module that is not lined up properly on the guides, you risk bending the connectors on the backplane. The middle section of backplane connectors is particularly vulnerable to accidental bending. When inserting a plug-in module, first check to see if the faceplate is lined up with the cutout, make sure the card is seated in the guide channel, then push the card in using the injection levers.

◆ Always use the injection/ejection levers (located at the top and bottom of a plug-in module) to inject and eject the module. Never push the module in by applying pressure with your hand on the module faceplate.

◆ Hand tighten the locking screws to secure a module in the shelf—do not use a power screwdriver. Power screwdrivers can break the heads off the locking screws, in which case you will have to use a power tool to back out the broken threads.

To install a new CPU or line card, follow these steps:

1. Take appropriate ESD precautions.

2. Remove the slot cover from the slot in which you want to install the module.

a. Loosen the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the slot cover.

b. Remove the slot cover.

3. Align the card with the card guide and carefully slide it into the slot.

4. Simultaneously close the top and bottom ejector levers to seat the card in the slot.

5. Secure the module in the chassis by tightening the screws.

Step 4: Make Signal Connections 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Step 4: Make Signal Connections

This section tells you how to make the connections that must be established in order for the UAP to operate.

Connecting to DS1 Facility LinesThis section tells you how to connect the UAP to DS1 facility lines. The connections and cables vary, depending on whether or not you have implemented DS1 protection switching via the 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 protection switch. In all cases, however, the following practices apply:

◆ The cabling at the DSX jack panel must be a mirror image of the cabling at the UAP. In other words, wire the transmit/out on the UAP to the OUT on the jack panel and wire the receive/in on the UAP to the IN on the jack panel.

◆ If you are using a cable supplied by ADC, wire the DS1 connectors with transmit/out on the top and receive/in on the bottom, skipping pin 13 and pin 38. If you are using a straight-through pre-wired cable supplied by a vendor other than ADC, ground the green/black pair which is wired to pin 38 (top) and pin 13 (bottom).

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 4: Make Signal Connections


Connecting the UAP Directly to a DSX Jack Panel

Use part#150-2377-04 cable

To connect the UAP to directly to a DSX jack panel (no protection switching), connect the appropriate Telco connector to the DSX jack panel, as shown in Figure 11. For Telco connector pin locations and pinouts, see “Connecting the UAP via the 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch” later in this section.

Figure 11 Connecting the UAP to a DSX Panel (no protection switching)

Fuse Panel (not supplied)

UAP

DSX Jack Panel (not supplied)

50-Pin Cablepart # 150-2377-04)

(UAP to DSXJack Panel)



Connecting the UAP via the 1:4 DS1 Protection SwitchEach optional 1:4 DS1 protection switch provides protection for up to four DS1 facility lines. You can daisy-chain two 1:4 DS1 protection switches to provide 1:8 protection, and you can connect up to four 1:4 DS1 protection switches together to provide protection for all DS1 cards on a single UAP shelf. All external connections to the 1:4 DS1 protection switch are made from the rear panel.

Figure 12 illustrates the locations of the rear panel connections on the 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 12 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch Rear Panel



-48V

DC

(A

)

-48V

DC

(B

)

Ret

urn

(A)

Ret

urn

(B)

Gro

und

DS1 InputConnect to Facility DS1s

DS1 OutputConnect to DS1 Interfaces on UAP

1234

1234 SPARE

Connect to UAP forSwitching Control

RS-232 IN

(optional) Connect to AdditionalDS1 Protection Switches

RS-232 OUT

Address



Figure 13 illustrates the cabling for a UAP connected to a DSX jack panel via a single 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 13 Cabling for UAP and a Single 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch

For Telco connector pin locations and pinouts, see “Connecting the UAP via the 1:4 DS1 Protection Switch” later in this chapter.

The DB-9 cables used to connect the UAP to the 1:4 DS1 protection switch and to connect one 1:4 DS1 protection switch to another use standard RS-232 straight-through pinouts. For pin locations, see Figure 17 later in this chapter.


UAP

-48V

DC

(A

)

-48V

DC

(B

)

Ret

urn

(A)

Ret

urn

(B)

Gro

und 1234

1234 SPARE


9-Pin Cable(part # 150-2378-01)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-01)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-01

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-03)(Protection Switch to DSX Jack panel)

(UAP to ProtectionSwitch--protected

board)

(UAP toProtection Switch--

"spare" board)

UAP toProtection Switch

Position 2 Position 3 Position 4Address1

2

3

4

OFF OFFOFF

OFF OFF

ON OFF

Position 1ON

OFF

ON

OFF OFF ON

ON

OFF

OFF

DS1 Protection Switch Address Dip Switch Settings



Figure 14 illustrates the cabling for a UAP connected to a DSX jack panel via two 1:4 DS1 protection switches daisy-chained together.

Figure 14 Cabling for UAP and Two 1:4 DS1 Protection Switches


The DB-9 cables used to connect the UAP to the 1:4 DS1 protection switch and to connect one 1:4 DS1 protection switch to another use standard RS-232 straight-through pinouts. For pin locations, see Figure 17 later in this chapter.


UAP-4

8V D

C (

A)

-48V

DC

(B

)

Ret

urn

(A)

Ret

urn

(B)

Gro

und 1234

1234 SPARE

-48V

DC

(A

)

-48V

DC

(B

)

Ret

urn

(A)

Ret

urn

(B)

Gro

und 1234

1234 SPARE


9-Pin Cable(part # 150-2378-01)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-03)

8 feet

2 feet

(part # 150-2377-02) Detail

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-02)

Y-cable--attach to

2 Protection Switches(see detail below)

(part # 150-2377-01)to connect UAP to

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-02)

Y-cable--attach to

2 Protection Switches(see detail below)

(part # 150-2377-01)to connect UAP to

(Protection Switch toDSX Jack Panel)

UAP toProtection Switch

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-01)

UAP toSingle Protection Switch

or to

(Y-cable) to connectMultiple Protection Switches

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-01)

UAP toSingle Protection Switch

or to (part # 150-2377-02)(Y-cable) to connect

Multiple Protection Switches


2

3

4

OFF OFFOFF

OFF OFF

ON OFF

Position 1ON

OFF

ON

OFF OFF ON

ON

OFF

OFF


(part # 150-2377-02)



To connect the UAP to a DSX jack panel via one or two 1:4 DS1 protection switches, follow these steps:


1. Connect the female (RS-232 IN) DB-9 connector on the rear of the first 1:4 DS1 protection switch to the upper right DB-9 connector on the rear of the UAP.

If you are connecting multiple DS1 protection switches, stack them in the rack on top of each other and connect them together via the DB-9 RS-232 connectors, connecting the top box to the rear of the UAP chassis.


2. (Optional) If you are connecting more than one DS1 protection switch, connect the male (plug) DB-9 connector on the rear of the first protection switch to the female (socket) DB-9 connector on the rear of the second protection switch.

3. (Optional) Repeat step 2 as necessary to connect additional DS1 protection switches, connecting the male DB-9 connector on the rear of the second protection switch to the female DB-9 connector on the rear of the third protection switch, and so on.

4. Connect up to four DS1 facility lines for each protection switch.

You must use the 25-pair to 25-pair cable provided by ADC.


a. Connect up to four incoming DS1 facility lines to the top row of 50-pin Telco connectors on the protection switch. See Table 10. earlier in this guide for the 50-pin Telco connector pinouts.


(plus Part#150-2377-02 Y-cable

if you have multipleDS1 protection

switches)

b. For each DS1 facility line that you have connected to a 50-pin connector on the top row of protection switch connectors, connect the corresponding 50-pin connector from the bottom row to a 50-pin connector on the rear of the UAP chassis.

For example, if you have connected input connector 1 on the top row to a DS1 facility line, connect output connector 1 on the bottom row to the connector for the UAP DS1 module you want to protect.


(plus part#150-2377-02 Y-cable

if you have multipleDS1 protection

switches)

c. Connect the 50-pin connector on the rear of the UAP that corresponds to the DS1 module that you want to use as the dedicated spare (i.e. the card that will provide protection) to the lower right 50-pin connector (labeled SPARE) on the rear of the DS1 protection switch.



5. Use the 4-bit switch to set the switch address as desired. The ON position is down. Table 8 lists the switch positions corresponding to the switch addresses.

You must set the address for each protection switch, as the CPU card addresses each protection switch by means of this setting.

Connecting the UAP via the 1:8 DS1 Protection SwitchEach optional 1:8 DS1 protection switch provides protection for up to eight DS1 facility lines. All external connections to the 1:8 DS1 protection switch are made from the rear panel. The 1:8 DS1 protection switch features a connector tray, which you pull out to access the Telco connectors, power terminals, and dip switches.

Figure 15 illustrates the locations of the rear panel connections on the 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 15 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch Rear Panel

Table 8 DS1 Protection Switch Addresses

Switch Address Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4

1 ON OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF


-48V DC (A)

-48V DC (B)

Return (A)

Return (B)

Ground


Address

1 O

UT

2 IN

2 OU

T

3 IN

3 OU

T

4 IN

4 OU

T

5 OU

T

6 IN

6 OU

T

7 IN

7 OU

T

8 IN

8 OU

T

SPA

RE

5 IN

1 IN


Cable Tie Holder

RS-232 IN (to UAP)

RS-232 OUT (not used)

Pull out tray to access Telco connectors, power terminal, and dip switches(See detail below)

Detail of 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch Connector Tray (as viewed from above)



Figure 16 illustrates the cabling for a UAP connected to a DSX jack panel via a 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

Figure 16 Cabling for UAP and a 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch


The DB-9 cables used to connect the UAP to the 1:8 DS1 protection switch use standard RS-232 straight-through pinouts. For pin locations, see Figure 17 later in this chapter.


UAP


9-Pin Cable(part # 150-2378-01)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-05)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-05)


protected T1 line card)


"spare" T1 line card)

50-Pin Cable(part # 150-2377-06)(Protection Switch to DSX Jack Panel)

UAP to Protection Switch


-48V DC (A)

-48V DC (B)

Return (A)

Return (B)

Ground


Address

1 O

UT

2 IN

2 OU

T

3 IN

3 OU

T

4 IN

4 OU

T

5 OU

T

6 IN

6 OU

T

7 IN

7 OU

T

8 IN

8 OU

T

SPA

RE

5 IN

1 IN


Cable Tie Holder

Detail of 1:8 DS1 Protection Switch Connector Tray

Pull out tray to access Telco connectors,power terminal and dip switch


2

3

4

OFF OFFOFF

OFF OFF

ON OFF

Position 1ON

OFF

ON

OFF OFF ON

ON

OFF

OFF


FTP-579



To connect the UAP to a DSX jack panel via a 1:8 DS1 protection switches, follow these steps:

1. Use the 4-bit switch to set the switch address as desired. The ON position is down. Table 9 lists the switch positions corresponding to the switch addresses.

Be sure to set the dip switches before you connect power to the 1:8 DS1 protection switch. If you connect the power first, you will not be able to access the dip switches.

You must set the address for each protection switch, as the CPU card addresses each protection switch by means of this setting.

2. Connect the female (RS-232 IN) DB-9 connector on the rear of the 1:8 DS1 protection switch to the upper right DB-9 connector on the rear of the UAP.

3. Connect up to eight DS1 facility lines for each protection switch.


a. Connect up to eight incoming DS1 facility lines to the DS1 IN connectors on the protection switch.


b. For each DS1 facility line that you have connected to an IN connector on the protection switch, connect the corresponding OUT connector to a 50-pin connector on the rear of the UAP chassis.

For example, if you have connected the 1 IN connector on the protection switch to a DS1 facility line, connect the 1 OUT connector to the 50-pin connector on the UAP that corresponds to the DS1 module you want to protect.

Use part#150-2377-05

c. Connect the 50-pin connector on the rear of the UAP that corresponds to the DS1 module that you want to use as the dedicated spare (i.e. the card that will provide protection) to the SPARE connector on the protection switch.

Table 9 DS1 Protection Switch Addresses

Switch Address Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4

1 ON OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF



Connector Pin Locations and PinoutsThis section illustrates the pin locations and lists the connector pinouts for the connectors used to connect the UAP.

DB-9 Connector Pin Locations Figure 17 illustrates the pin locations for male and female DB-9 connectors. For specific pinouts, see Figure 27 later in this chapter.

Figure 17 DB-9 Connector Pin Locations

Ethernet Connector Pin Locations Figure 18 illustrates the pin locations for Ethernet (RJ-48) connectors. For specific pinouts, see Figure 27 later in this chapter.

Figure 18 Ethernet Connector (RJ-48) Pin Locations

Pin 5

Pin 9

Pin 6

Pin 1

Pin 1

Pin 6

Pin 9

Pin 5

DB-9 Male Connector Pin Locations DB-9 Female Connector Pin Locations

PIN 1

PIN 8



Telco (50-pin) Connector Pin Locations and Pinouts Figure 19 illustrates the pin locations for a right-angle reversed Telco connector. You use this type of connector to connect the UAP chassis:

◆ cable #150-2377-01 (UAP to 1:4 DS1 protection switch)

◆ cable #150-2377-02 (UAP (via cable #150-2377-01) to two 1:4 DS1 protection switches)


◆ cable #150-2377-04 (UAP to DSX jack panel)

Figure 19 50-pin Right Angle Reversed Telco Connector

Figure 20 illustrates the pin locations for a right-angle Telco connector. You use this type of connector to connect to the 1:8 DS1 protection switch:

◆ cable #150-2377-05 (UAP to 1:8 DS1 protection switch).

◆ cable #150-2377-06 (1:8 DS1 protection switch to DSX jack panel).

Figure 20 50-pin Right Angle Telco Connector

Pin 1 Pin 25

Pin 50Pin 26

Pin 50 Pin 26

Pin 1Pin 25



Figure 21 illustrates the pin locations for a straight Telco connector. You use this type of connector to connect the 1:4 DS1 protection switch:


◆ cable #150-2377-03 (1:4 DS1 protection switch to DSX jack panel)


Figure 21 50-pin Straight Telco Connector

Table 10. lists the connector pinouts and wire color coding for the 50-pin Telco connectors used on the following cables:


◆ cable #150-2377-03 (1:4 DS1 protection switch to DSX jack panel)


.

Pin 50 Pin 26

Pin 1Pin 25

Table 10. 50-Pin Telco Connector Pinouts (Cable #s 150-2377-01, 150-2377-03, 150-2377-02)

Receive/In (back to central office) Transmit/Out (to field)

TipSolid Color

Stripe Color Ring

Solid Color

Stripe Color Tip

Solid Color

Stripe Color Ring

Solid Color

Stripe Color

26 White Blue 1 Blue White 39 Black Brown 14 Brown Black

27 White Orange 2 Orange White 40 Black Slate 15 Slate Black

28 White Green 3 Green White 41 Yellow Blue 16 Blue Yellow

29 White Brown 4 Brown White 42 Yellow Orange 17 Orange Yellow

30 White Slate 5 Slate White 43 Yellow Green 18 Green Yellow

31 Red Blue 6 Blue Red 44 Yellow Brown 19 Brown Yellow

32 Red Orange 7 Orange Red 45 Yellow Slate 20 Slate Yellow

33 Red Green 8 Green Red 46 Violet Blue 21 Blue Violet

34 Red Brown 9 Brown Red 47 Violet Orange 22 Orange Violet

35 Red Slate 10 Slate Red 48 Violet Green 23 Green Violet

36 Black Blue 11 Blue Black 49 Violet Brown 24 Brown Violet

37 Black Orange 12 Orange Black 50 Violet Slate 25 Slate Violet



Table 11. lists the connector pinouts and wire color coding for the 50-pin Telco connectors used on the following cables:

◆ cable #150-2377-05 (UAP to 1:8 DS1 protection switch).

◆ cable #150-2377-06 (1:8 DS1 protection switch to DSX jack panel).

◆ cable #150-2377-04 (UAP to DSX jack panel).

Table 11. 50-Pin Telco Connector Pinouts (Cable #s 150-2377-05, 150-2377-06, 150-2377-04)

Receive/InBlue Binder (back to central office)

Transmit/Out (to field)Silver Binder (to field)

TipSolid Color

Stripe Color Ring

Solid Color

Stripe Color Tip

Solid Color

Stripe Color Ring

Solid Color

Stripe Color

26 White Blue 1 Blue White 39 White Blue 14 Blue White

27 White Orange 2 Orange White 40 White Orange 15 Orange White

28 White Green 3 Green White 41 White Green 16 Green White

29 White Brown 4 Brown White 42 White Brown 17 Brown White

30 White Slate 5 Slate White 43 White Slate 18 Slate White

31 Red Blue 6 Blue Red 44 Red Blue 19 Blue Red

32 Red Orange 7 Orange Red 45 Red Orange 20 Orange Red

33 Red Green 8 Green Red 46 Red Green 21 Green Red

34 Red Brown 9 Brown Red 47 Red Brown 22 Brown Red

35 Red Slate 10 Slate Red 48 Red Slate 23 Slate Red

36 Black Blue 11 Blue Black 49 Black Blue 24 Blue Black

37 Black Orange 12 Orange Black 50 Black Orange 25 Orange Black



Connecting to a DS3 Cross-ConnectConnect the UAP to a DS3 cross-connect using the BNC connectors in the column corresponding to the slot in which the DS3 module you want to connect is installed. As shown in Figure 22, the top connector is the receive connector and the bottom connector is the transmit connector.

Figure 22 UAP DS3 Module Connections

DS3

ConnectorsCoax

Port 1 RecieveTransmit

Port 2 NotUsed

Cable Management



Connecting DS3 Modules for Standby Protection

For protection switching, the DS3 signal from the cross-connect is split into two paths: main and standby. To connect the DS3 module for standby protection, as illustrated in Figure 23, follow these steps:

1. Connect the active DS3 signal from the cross-connect to port 1 of the active DS3 module.

2. Connect the standby DS3 signal from the cross-connect to port 1 of the standby DS3 module.

Figure 23 Connecting DS3 Modules for Standby Protection

RxPort 1

Port 2 (not used)

Remote Device

(DACS orM13 Multiplexer)

DS3 ModuleActive

DS3 ModuleStandby

DS3 Cable Splitter

DS3 Cable SplitterTx

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs


Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs

The UAP does not have a power switch. The unit is powered up as soon as you connect it to a power source.

CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power, see “Chassis Specifications” in Chapter 1 for electrical specifications and take the following precautions:To prevent circuit overloading, consider the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloaded circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Take into account equipment nameplate ratings when addressing this concern.Make sure that all equipment is reliably grounded at all times, giving particular attention to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit.

To connect the UAP and optional DS1 protection switch(es) to a DC power source, follow these steps:

1. Terminate a DC power lead from the office power source to the DC power input (-48V) terminal on the PWR A block on the on the rear of the UAP.

2. Connect the -48V Return terminal to the Return terminal on the PWR A block.

3. Connect the office ground leads to the Grnd terminal on the PWR A block.

4. (optional) Connect the optional DS1 protection switch(es) to DC power using the 5-position power terminal block. You can wire two power sources to provide power protection. Input voltage is -48V DC.

Figure 24 illustrates the terminal blocks and grounding terminals on the rear of the UAP chassis. See Figure 12 and Figure 15 earlier in this chapter for the location of the power terminal block on the 1:4 and 1:8 DS1 protection switches.

Be sure to set the address dip switches before you connect power to the 1:8 DS1 protection switch. If you connect the power first, you will not be able to access the dip switches.

Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Figure 24 UAP DC Power Terminal Blocks and Grounding Terminals

Verifying Front Panel LEDsWhen you apply power to the UAP, the unit initializes and goes through a series of self checks. After the UAP is powered up, you should check the front panel LEDs, as described in the following sections.

Checking CPU Module and UAP StatusFigure 25 shows the location of the CPU module LEDs. The Critical (CRIT), Major (MAJ), Minor (MIN), and Miscellaneous (MISC) LEDs on the front of the active CPU module indicate the overall status of the UAP. The Fail and Active (ACT) LEDs indicate alarm conditions on the UAP. The ACO LED indicates the status of the ACO (alarm cutoff) switch.

Cable Management

PWR A

PWR B Ground

-48VReturn

Ground

-48VReturn

Ground



Figure 25 UAP CPU Card LEDs

When you boot the CPU module—either by booting up the UAP or by inserting a CPU module into a running system—the CPU starts the initialization process, and the CPU module LEDs illuminate as follows:

◆ The FAIL LED lights red briefly.

◆ The ACT LED blinks green.

ACO

ACOButton

DB-9Connector

MISCMINMAJ

CRITACTFAIL



When the CPU module successfully completes the initialization process and is operational, the LEDs illuminate as follows:

◆ The FAIL LED goes off and stays off.

◆ The ACT LED lights green and stays on.

◆ The ACO LED lights green when the ACO circuit is activated.

The ACO circuit allows you to turn off the audible alarm contact—either by pressing the ACO button on the front panel of the active CPU module, or via a remote input provided on a set of wire wrap posts on an alarm/fuse panel. The ACO circuit is activated and the ACO LED lights green when the audible alarm contact is turned off—by pressing either the physical ACO button or the software equivalent of the ACO button (implemented in the Craft, TL1, and WebView interfaces). If the state of any of the critical, major, or minor alarms changes (the alarms clear or a new alarm activates), the ACO function is automatically reset, turning the ACO LED off.

The CRIT, MAJ, MIN, and MISC alarms illuminate only if there is an alarm condition on the UAP. If any of the alarm LEDs remain on after the UAP powers up completely, use one of the equipment management interfaces (Craft, TL1, or ANDA WebView) to determine what alarms exist on the system.

For details about how to monitor alarms using the Craft interface, see “Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface” in Chapter 4. For details about how to monitor alarms using the TL1 interface, see “Alarm Management Commands” in Chapter 5. For details about how to monitor alarms using ANDA WebView, see “Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView” in Chapter 6.

Standby CPU Module LEDs If your system is configured with redundant CPU modules, the LEDs on the standby CPU module illuminate as follows:

◆ The standby CPU module goes through the same initialization process as the active CPU module, and the ACT LED on the standby CPU module lights green when initialization is complete.

◆ The alarm LEDs on the standby CPU module do not illuminate to indicate alarm conditions.

◆ If the standby CPU takes over for the active CPU, it assumes the alarm LED illumination that was present on the active CPU module when it failed.

◆ The FAIL LED on the standby CPU module lights red if the module fails—just as the FAIL LED on the active CPU module lights to indicate an active CPU module failure.



Table 12 describes the UAP CPU module LEDs. These LEDs indicate the overall status and alarm conditions for the UAP.

Table 12 UAP CPU Card LEDs

LED Label LED Appearance Description

FAIL Off

Red

No failures exist on the CPU card.

A card failure exists on the CPU card.

ACT Off

Green

The CPU card is not active.

The CPU card is active.

CRIT Off

Red

No outstanding critical alarms exist in the UAP.

At least one outstanding critical alarm exists in the UAP.

MAJ OFF

Red

No outstanding major alarms exist in the UAP.

At least one outstanding major alarm exists in the UAP.

MIN Off

Yellow

No outstanding minor alarms exist in the UAP.

At least one outstanding minor alarm exists in the UAP.

MISC Off

Yellow

No outstanding miscellaneous alarms exist in the UAP. Miscellaneous alarms pertain to power and fan problems and user-configured external alarms.

At least one outstanding miscellaneous alarm exists in the UAP.

ACO Off

Green

The audible alarm outputs are not inhibited due to the fact that either the ACO switch has not been pressed or there has been a new alarm since the last time the ACO switch was pressed.

The audible alarm outputs are inhibited because the ACO switch has been pressed.



Checking DS1 and DS3 Module StatusThe LEDs on the front of each DS1 and DS3 module indicate the status of the card. Figure 26 illustrates the DS1 line card front panel LEDs. The DS3 module LEDs are the same.

Figure 26 UAP DS1 Line Card LEDs

The DS1 or DS3 module must be physically installed and logically assigned to the slot before the LEDs will illuminate. For details about how to logically assign cards to slots, see “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface” in Chapter 4, “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface” in Chapter 5, or “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView” in Chapter 6.

When you boot a DS1 or DS3 module—either by booting up the UAP or by inserting a DS1 or DS3 module into a running system—the board starts the initialization process and the DS1 or DS3 module LEDs should illuminate as follows:

◆ The FAIL LED lights red briefly.

◆ The ACT LED blinks green.

When the DS1 or DS3 module successfully completes the initialization process and is operational, the LEDs illuminate as follows:

◆ The FAIL LED goes off and stays off.

◆ The ACT LED lights green and stays on.

If the board has a hardware failure:

ACTFAIL

ANDADS1



◆ The FAIL LED lights red and stays on.

◆ The ACT LED turns off.

Table 13 describes the DS1 and DS3 module LEDs.

Standby DS1 or DS3 Module LEDs If your system is configured with DS1 or DS3 protection switching, the LEDs on a standby DS1 or DS3 module (a module used as a spare to provide protection) illuminate as follows:

◆ A standby DS1 or DS3 module goes through the same initialization process as an active DS1 or DS3 module.

◆ At the end of the initialization process, the ACT LED on a standby DS1 or DS3 module turns off and stays off as long as the module is in standby mode.

◆ If a standby DS1 or DS3 module takes over for a protected DS1 or DS3 module, the ACT LED on the standby module lights green and stays on.

◆ If you provision a DS1 or DS3 module as a standby module and then remove that provisioning via one of the user interfaces (Craft, TL1, or WebView), the ACT LED on the standby module lights green and stays on.

◆ The FAIL LED on a standby DS1 or DS3 module lights red if the module fails—just as the FAIL LED on an active DS1 or DS3 module lights to indicate an active DS1 or DS3 module failure.

Table 13 UAP DS1 Line Card LEDs

LED Label LED Appearance Description

FAIL OFF

RED

No failures exist on the DS1 line card.

A card failure exists on the DS1 line card.

ACT OFF

GREEN

The DS1 line card is not active.

The DS1 line card is active.

Step 6: Make External Connections 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Checking DS1 Protection Switch StatusProtection relay status is indicated by the LEDs on the front of the DS1 protection switch.

1:4 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs

◆ POWER LED — Indicates that the DS1 protection switch is receiving power. When you apply power to the DS1 protection switch, the POWER LED should light within a few seconds.

◆ TEST LED — This LED is reserved for future use.

◆ 1, 2, 3, 4 LEDs — Illuminate when the corresponding DS1 input has switched over to the spare DS1.

1:8 DS1 Protection Switch LEDs

◆ POWER LED — Indicates that the DS1 protection switch is receiving power. When you apply power to the DS1 protection switch, the POWER LED should light within a few seconds.

◆ TEST button — Press this button to test the functionality of the DS1 input (1-8) LEDs.

◆ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 LEDs — Illuminate when the corresponding DS1 input has switched over to the spare DS1.

Step 6: Make External Connections

This section provides information about making the following types of external connections to the UAP:

◆ Connecting the UAP for configuration and management

◆ Connecting the UAP to non-traffic devices

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 6: Make External Connections


Figure 27 illustrates the external wiring for the UAP.

Figure 27 External Wiring for UAP

T1

Line

Jac

ks(5

0-pi

n; o

ne p

er T

1 ca

rd)

Ala

rm O

ut (

DB

-9)

Prim

ary

Eth

erne

tS

econ

dary

Eth

erne

t

DS

3

Con

nect

ors

Coa

xP

ort 1

Rec

ieve

Tran

smit

Por

t 2R

ecie

veTr

ansm

it

Net

wor

k C

lock

Out

Net

wor

k C

lock

In

Cab

le M

anag

emen

t

Wire

Wra

p P

osts

CR

_AU

D

CR

_VIS

MJ_

AU

D

MJ_

VIS

MN

_AU

D

MN

_VIS

PW

R_M

IN

AC

O_I

N

CR

_AU

D

CR

_VIS

MJ_

AU

D

MJ_

VIS

MN

_AU

D

MN

_VIS

PW

R_M

IN

AC

O_I

N

X XX X

DB

-9 M

ale

to D

B-9

Fem

ale

DS

1 P

rote

ctio

nP

rote

ctio

n S

witc

h

PIN

8

PIN

7

PIN

6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

PIN

9C

R_A

UD

CR

_VIS

MJ_

AU

D

MJ_

VIS

MN

_AU

D

MN

_VIS

PW

R_M

ISC

BAT

OU

T -

48V

AC

O IN

To O

ffice

Ala

rms

(Ala

rm O

utpu

t Rel

ay B

ox)

Ala

rm O

utpu

t Rel

ay B

ox

PIN

8

PIN

7

PIN

6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

PIN

9A

LAR

M 1

ALA

RM

2

ALA

RM

3

ALA

RM

4

ALA

RM

5

ALA

RM

6

ALA

RM

7

ALA

RM

8

X

From

Cen

tral

Offi

ceA

larm

sA

larm

In (

DB

-9)

PIN

8

PIN

7

PIN

6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

PIN

9X X X X N

ET

CLK

P

NE

T C

LK N

X X GR

OU

ND

PIN

8

PIN

7

PIN

6

PIN

5

PIN

4

PIN

3

PIN

2

PIN

1

PIN

9X X X X N

ET

CLK

P

NE

T C

LK N

X X GR

OU

ND

Ñ ÑTX

-

RX

+

TX

+P

IN 1

PIN

2

PIN

3

PIN

4

PIN

5

PIN

6

PIN

7

PIN

8

RX

-

Ñ Ñ

Eth

erne

t Con

nect

ion

Por

t (R

J-48

)

(DB

-9)

(DB

-9)

Use

NC

TM

(Fro

m E

xter

nal C

lock

)

DB

-9 M

ale

to D

B-9

Fem

ale

(par

t # 1

50-2

378-

02)C

able

To A

larm

Out

Ala

rm C

onta

ct

(par

t # 1

50-2

378-

02)C

able

(see

pin

outs

abo

ve)

RS

-232

(fo

r fu

ture

use

)

Pro

duct

#44

1400

to te

rmin

ate

last

uni

t

# 15

0-12

378-

01 (

1:4)

or

# 15

0-12

378-

02 (

1:8)

Cab

le



Connecting the UAP for Configuration and Management

This section tells you how to set up the physical connections required for you to be able to configure and manage the UAP via the Craft or TL1 messaging interface or via ANDA WebView. These connections are illustrated in Figure 28.

Figure 28 UAP Management Interfaces

As illustrated in Figure 28, you can connect the UAP for configuration and management in the following ways:

◆ Connect directly to a local terminal

◆ Connect via an analog modem

◆ Connect to the network management LAN

You can use either the Craft interface, TL1 messaging, or ANDA WebView with any of these connections.

The following subsections provide further details about how to make management connections. For further details about IP address selection and network setup, see “Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity” later in this chapter.

RS-232C, 9600 baud (TL1)

LAN

UAP

UAP (Direct)

- - OR - -

(Ethernet TCP)

CMIP(TL1)

10 or 100 Mbps(TCP)



Connecting to the UAP Directly via a Local TerminalConnect directly to the active CPU module of the UAP via an RS-232 port at 9600 baud.

To connect the UAP directly to a local VT100 terminal, connect a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 cable from the male (plug) DB-9 connector on the front of the active CPU module to the female (socket) DB-9 connector on the terminal, as shown in Figure 29. For cable pinouts, see Figure 27.

Figure 29 Connecting Directly to a Local Workstation

CraftTerminal



Connecting to the UAP via an Analog Modem

When you connect to the UAP via an analog modem, the Craft interface communicates via an RS-232 serial connection. Since the connection offers no flow control or interface with the modem connection, it is crucial that you configure the modem correctly.

ADC recommends the use of a US Robotics 56K modem, as this modem has been tested successfully in this configuration.

Figure 30 illustrates the correct setup for connecting an external modem to the Craft Interface RS-232 port.

Figure 30 Modem Connection to UAP Craft Interface

On the remote end, we recommend that you use HyperTerminal, a terminal emulation software provided as an accessory with Windows® NT or 95/98. Set the terminal emulation parameters to be the same as those of the UAP, as shown in Figure 30. Once you have connected to the UAP via the modem, you can perform all operations just as though a physical local connection was in place.

To set the terminal emulation parameters, follow these steps:

1. From the Windows Task bar, select Start, then Programs, then Accessories, then Communications, then HyperTerminal to open the HyperTerminal folder.

2. Double-click HyperTerm.exe to launch HyperTerminal and open the Connection Description window.

3. Enter a Name and select an Icon to represent the connection.

4. Click OK to open the Properties window.

UAP RS-232 DB-9Craft Interface

Null Modem

US Robotics56K Modem

Switch Settings

1 Low2 Low3 High4 Low5 High6 Down7 Low8 Low

9600 Baud

Data Bits: 8

Stop Bits: 1

Parity: None

Flow Control: None



5. In the Connect To tab, make the following settings:

◆ In the Phone Number field, enter the phone number for the modem connected to the UAP.

◆ In the Connect using field, select the modem you connected to the remote PC.

6. Click Configure to open the Modem Properties window.

7. In the General tab, set the Maximum speed to 9600.

Do not select the connect at only this speed option or conflicts may arise between the modems.

8. In the Connection tab, make the following settings:

◆ Set Data bits to 8.

◆ Set Parity to None.

◆ Set Stop bits to 1.

9. Click OK to return to the Properties window.

10. In the Settings tab, from the Emulation field, select ANSI.

11. Click OK to confirm your configuration.



Connecting to the UAP via the Network Management LANConnect to the UAP over an Ethernet LAN, as illustrated in Figure 31.

Figure 31 Connecting to the Network Management LAN

You can connect the UAP to the LAN by either connecting directly to a PC or by connecting to a router or hub. If the active system module is installed in slot 11, you must connect to the primary Ethernet port. If the active system module is installed in slot 12, you must connect to the secondary Ethernet port

◆ To connect the UAP directly to a PC, use a crossover cable. Table 14 lists the connector pinouts.

◆ To connect the UAP to a router or hub, use a straight-through cable.

Primary

(RJ-48)Ethernet

LAN

RemoteWorkstation

Table 14 UAP to PC Crossover Cable Pinouts

Tx+ Rx+

Tx- Rx-

Rx+ Tx+

Rx- Tx-



Connecting the UAP to Non-Traffic DevicesYou can integrate the UAP into any telecommunications system by connecting the unit to external alarm inputs and an external clock source. The following subsections describe how to make these connections.

Connecting the Alarm Output Relay BoxThe alarm output relay box on the rear of the UAP provides two-wire dry-contact alarm outputs, rated at 30V DC, 2A. You can use these outputs in lieu of a local alarm panel to connect external alarms.

Make connections to the alarm output relay box as follows:

◆ Connect the DB-9 male (plug) Alarm Out connector on the alarm output relay box to the DB-9 female (socket) Alarm Out connector on the rear of the UAP, as shown in Figure 32. For connector pinouts, see Figure 27. You must use the cable provided by ADC for this connection.

Figure 32 Connecting the Alarm Output Relay Box to the UAP

◆ Connect the external alarm outputs to notify the central office of existing alarm conditions.

◆ Connect the alarm inputs to notify the UAP of alarm states existing in peripheral equipment. Table 15 lists the normally open dry contacts and ACO input provided by the alarm output relay box.

Cable Management

Use cable suppliedby Network



The alarm output relay box wire-wrap posts can accept two connections of 26 or 24 AWG wire. The two ends of the normally-open dry contacts are across from each other and can be connected either way. The ACO signal needs only one connection, using either side as required by the application.

You can gang alarms together between UAP alarm output relay boxes by wiring a second wrap per post to another UAP alarm output relay box, continuing these connections as needed before bringing them back to an external alarm panel. The UAP alarm output relay box also features four spare unlabeled, unconnected posts which you can use for additional connection ganging as necessary.

The alarm output relay box supports the remote ACO input function for the UAP by detecting the closure status of an external remote alarm cutoff switch. You can wire the remote ACO switch to either the ACO_IO or the ACO_IN post, depending on whether the remote ACO switch is normally open (connected to battery return on closure) or normally closed (normally connected to battery return).

◆ If you are wiring the UAP to a normally open remote ACO switch, use the ACO_IO post. The UAP ACO input is activated when the remote switch is pressed. In this case, the ACO button on the front panel of the active CPU card can perform ACO output as well as supporting the normal ACO input.

◆ If you are wiring the UAP to a normally closed remote ACO switch, use the ACO_IN post. The UAP ACO input is activated when the remote switch is released. In this case, the ACO output function is not available.

Table 15 Alarm Output Relay Box Normally Open Dry Contacts and ACO Input

Function Marking, Side 1 Marking, Side 2

Critical AudioCritical Visual

CR_AUDCR_VIS

CR_AUDdCR_VIS

Major AudioMajor Visual

MJ_AUDMJ_VIS

MJ_AUDMJ_VIS

Minor AudioMinor Visual

MN_AUDMN_VIS

MN_AUDMN_VIS

Power MinorAlarm Cutoff

PWR_MNACO_IN

PWR_MNACO_IO

Unconnected SpareUnconnected Spare

[none][none]

[none][none]

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity


Connecting the External Clock SourceConnect the UAP to an external clock source via the Network Clock In (input) and Network Clock Out (output) DB-9 connectors on the rear of the UAP. For connector pinouts, see Figure 27. You can connect and drive multiple UAP systems off the same source.

For single units or the last connected unit being supplied the external clock, apply a 100 Ohm network connection termination module (NCTM) across the P&N pins on the extension (Network Clock Out) port. The NCTM (Product #441400) is available from ADC.

Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity

An Ethernet connection to the UAP allows you to:

◆ Initiate telnet sessions, which provide the same functionality as local Craft interface sessions.

◆ Initiate browser sessions.

◆ Download new firmware via TFTP to both the CPU and the application modules (i.e. DS1 and DS3).

The following subsections outline Ethernet connectivity issues for this host software release and tell you how to configure Ethernet properties for the UAP.

Ethernet Connectivity Issues for Host Software Release 1.0.0The following Ethernet connectivity issues pertain to host software release 1.0.0 for the UAP:

◆ CPU redundancy requires that each CPU module have its own IP address.

◆ If the active system module is installed in slot 11, you must connect to the primary Ethernet port. If the active system module is installed in slot 12, you must connect to the secondary Ethernet port.

IMPORTANT: You must make all changes to Ethernet properties at bootup. For this host software release, do not use the commands in the Craft interface IP Address menu to change the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway.

◆ Upon bootup, the IP address must correspond with the gateway address (they must be on the same network), or the system will not boot properly and could potentially enter a state of continuous reboot.

Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Configuring Ethernet PropertiesTo configure Ethernet properties at bootup, follow these steps:

1. Reboot the system. The following information appears on the screen as the system reboots:

Anda Networks, Inc. V1.0.0Copyright (c) 1998 - 2000, Anda Networks, Inc.--------------------------------------------------------------------------Slot Number : 0START-UP MODE: Run the ANDA CPU Board SoftwareNETWORK INTERFACE PARAMETERS: IP address on LAN is 222.32.55.10 LAN interface’s subnet mask is 0xffffff00 IP address of default gateway to other networks is 222.32.55.1HARDWARE PARAMETERS: Serial channels will use a baud rate of 9600HARDWARE PARAMETERS: Processor : MPC860 (Rev B.0), Running at 52Mhz Boot Rom Version : 0.3.0.CPU.ROM, Date : Sep 7 1999 Board memory : FLASH : 16Mbytes, 60ns, Enabled

SDRAM : 64Mbytes, 60ns, Enabled Board’s Ethernet hardware address : 00:50:ED: 0:10:19 After board is reset, start-up code will wait 5 seconds--------------------------------------------------------------------------To change any of this, press any key within 5 seconds

Note that this information includes the IP address, the (LAN interface’s) subnet mask, and the (IP address of the) default gateway.

The last line of the information is the action prompt:

To change any of this, press any key within 5 seconds

2. At the action prompt, press any key to bring up the option prompt:

(M)odify any of this or (C>ontinue Maintenance or (R)un Application ? [R]

3. Type m to modify the current settings.

The following screen appears:

How should the board boot?

1. pROBE+ stand-alone mode

2. pROBE+ waiting for host debugger via serial connection

3. pROBE+ waiting for host debugger via a network connection

4. Run the ANDA CPU Board Software

Which one do you want? [4] 4

4. Type 4 to specify that the system should run the software after the changes have been implemented. You can also press [Return] to accept the default value ([4]) in brackets.



The UAP interface displays the following series of prompts. Respond to each prompt as directed in steps 5-10. Default values are indicated in brackets. You can press [Return] to retain these values.

NETWORK INTERFACE PARAMETERS:

Do you want a LAN interface? [Y]

This board’s LAN IP address(0.0.0.0 = RARP)? [222.32.55.10]

Subnet mask for LAN (0 for none)? [255.255.255.0]

Should there be a default gateway for packet routing? [Y]

What is its IP address? [222.32.55.1]

HARDWARE PARAMETERS:

Baud rate for serial channels [9600]

HARDWARE PARAMETERS:

Do you want to change the board’s Ethernet address? [N]

How long (in seconds) should CPU delay before starting up? [20]

Additional prompts will appear, but you do not need to change them.

5. At the Do you want a LAN interface? prompt, type y.

6. At the This board’s LAN IP address(0.0.0.0 = RARP)? [222.32.55.10] prompt, type the new IP address, in ###.###.###.### format.

7. At the Subnet mask for LAN (0 for none)? [255.255.255.0] prompt, type the new subnet mask, in ###.###.###.### format.

8. At the Should there be a default gateway for packet routing? prompt, type y.

9. At the What is its IP address? prompt, type the new gateway IP address, in ###.###.###.### format.

10. At each of the additional prompts, press [Enter] to accept the default values.

If you are using redundant CPU modules, the MAC addresses of the two CPU modules should be different.

11. After it accepts the additional parameters, the system does a partial reboot:

Slot Number : 0START-UP MODE: Run the ANDA CPU Board SoftwareNETWORK INTERFACE PARAMETERS: IP address on LAN is 222.32.55.10 LAN interface’s subnet mask is 0xffffff00 IP address of default gateway to other networks is 222.32.55.1HARDWARE PARAMETERS: Serial channels will use a baud rate of 9600HARDWARE PARAMETERS: Processor : MPC860 (Rev B.0), Running at 52Mhz Boot Rom Version : 0.3.0.CPU.ROM, Date : Sep 7 1999 Board memory : FLASH : 16Mbytes, 60ns, Enabled

SDRAM : 64Mbytes, 60ns, Enabled Board’s Ethernet hardware address : 00:50:ED: 0:10:F4 After board is reset, start-up code will wait 5 seconds--------------------------------------------------------------------------(M)odify any of this or (C>ontinue Maintenance or (R)un Application ? [R]

The last line is the final prompt:

(M)odify any of this or (C>ontinue Maintenance or (R)un Application ? [R]

Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


12. Type r to put the application into run mode.

A series of messages appears, beginning with:

Updating parameter storage. This may take a while...Done

When the boot process is complete, the UAP> prompt appears. Do not enter the system to configure the UAP, however, until the following message appears:

***** This System Board is ACTIVE now *****

You must assign the CPU module IP addresses via the physical Craft interface, as described above, before you can manage the UAP. If your system is configured with redundant CPU modules, you must assign different IP addresses to each CPU module.




Getting Started

This chapter tells you how to prepare the UAP for management, describes how to select a management interface, and outlines the configuration process for the UAP. It contains the following sections:

◆ Key Tips and Cautions

◆ Preparing the UAP for Management

◆ Selecting a Management Interface

◆ Configuration Basics

Key Tips and Cautions This section provides key tips and cautions to follow when installing and configuring the UAP. Other specific hints appear in the appropriate sections later in this guide.

Be sure to read and follow the guidelines outlined below and elsewhere in this guide. Failure to do so can compromise the integrity of the installation and corrupt the persistent database.

IMPORTANT: Always wait 10 minutes after replacing or restoring a CPU board so the currently-active CPU board can download all of its configuration information to the new board. If you insert the new board too soon, the persistent database will be corrupted and you will have to erase the database and rebuild all network configurations. One way to determine if your database is corruted is to check the CRV list (for details, see “Viewing CRV Values” in Chapter 4 or “Viewing the CRV List” in Chapter 6. Any abnormalities in the CRV list may indicate a corrupted database.

IMPORTANT: As you configure the UAP, save the provisioned data (from the Craft Provision menu, enter save provisioned data, or from ANDA WebView, click Persistent Data, then click Save) and wait for the screen to display a message that the flash memory is complete. Do not enter any keystrokes until this message appears:***** Provisioned data has been archived *****

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Preparing the UAP for Management


To view the status of the CPU, enter system information then system status from the Craft interface. The System Status menu lists the current condition of the active and standby CPUs. You can also view this information on the System Information page in ANDA WebView (click System Information in the sidebar menu).

IMPORTANT: Save provisioned data (from the Provision menu, enter save provisioned data or from ANDA WebView, click Persistent Data, then click Save) each time you make a provisioning change and always keep a copy of the persistent database in a known backup directory in case you need to restore the database due to corruption. You should also save the configuration screen as a text file and keep a paper copy of your provisioning information for reference.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that the UAP supports only four concurrent telnet sessions at any given time and that a WebView browser session counts as one of these four sessions. If you attempt to log on with a fifth telnet session, not only will the session fail to connect, but the other sessions will also be shut down. You must select Disconnect from the File menu in order to disconnect—simply closing the telnet window does not disconnect the session. If you attempt to log on to WebView with four telnet sessions running, you will not be able to access WebView.s

IMPORTANT: The system takes 5-10 minutes to complete the reboot process after you assign cards to the slots via the Craft interface Inventory feature. Always wait 10 minutes to ensure that this process is complete before you begin provisioning services. The appearance of the card in the Physical column on the Craft interface Inventory menu or TL1 equipment list or in the Plugged In column on the ANDA WebView System Inventory page indicates that the reboot process is complete.

Preparing theUAP for Management

To prepare the UAP for management, follow these steps:

For detailed installation instructions see Chapter 2.

1. Unpack and rack-mount the UAP.

2. Install the CPU module(s).

If desired, you can install the DS1 line cards and DS3 modules and make external connections (other than power) after you make logical slot assignments using the Craft interface, the TL1 messaging system, or ANDA WebVIew—just make sure the physical installation matches the logical configuration. To manage and monitor the UAP, however, you must first complete all external connections (signaling, protection switching, alarms, and clocking).

Selecting a Management Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


3. Apply power and perform LED verifications and checks, as described in Chapter 2.

The UAP does not have a power switch. The unit is powered up as soon as you connect it to a power source.

4. Connect directly to a local terminal, using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 cable. Connect the cable from the male (plug) DB-9 connector on the front of the active CPU module to the female (socket) DB-9 connector on the terminal.

5. Assign IP addresses to the CPU module(s). For details, “Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity” in Chapter 2.

You must assign the UAP IP addresses via the physical Craft interface before you can manage the UAP. If your system is configured with redundant CPU modules, you must assign different IP addresses to each CPU module.

Selecting a Management Interface

After you have prepared the UAP for management, as described in the previous section, follow one of these procedures to select a management interface: Craft, TL1, or ANDA WebView.

Logging on to the Craft InterfaceTo log on to the Craft interface, follow these steps:

1. Bring up the uap> prompt.

◆ On bootup or reboot:

a. Connect a local terminal to the UAP via the DB-9 connector on the front of the active CPU card, or connect to the UAP via an analog modem connection or telnet session.

b. Use a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal, to communicate with the UAP and wait for the following prompt.

This System is now Active

c. Press [Enter] to display the uap> prompt.

◆ If the system is active:


b. Use a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal, to communicate with the UAP.


2. At the uap> prompt, enter:

craft

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Selecting a Management Interface


Any entry you make at the uap> prompt must be in all lowercase letters. Regardless of the median used to access the shelf, or the screen in view, typing ? brings up a list of shortcuts—abbreviated commands for each action available in that screen.

3. At the login> prompt, enter the default login name:

admin

4. At the password> prompt, enter the default password (password#1) to open the Craft interface main menu.

5. See Chapter 4 for details about how to configure and manage the UAP using the Craft interface.

Logging on as TL1 InterfaceTo log on as TL1 interface, follow these steps:














tl1

Enter TL1 interface commands in all lowercase letters.

3. At the ; prompt, enter:

act-user::admin:1::password#1;

to initiate a user session using the default uid (admin) and pid (password#1).

To log out of the TL1 interface, enter exit.

4. See Chapter 5 for details about how to configure and manage the UAP using the TL1 interface.

Accessing ANDA WebViewTo access ANDA WebView, follow these steps:

1. Connect a workstation to the UAP in one of these ways:

◆ Over an analog modem to the corporate LAN where the UAP is installed

◆ Directly to the corporate LAN where the UAP is installed

2. Launch one of the following web browsers:

◆ Internet Explorer, version 4.x or higher

◆ Netscape Communicator, version 4.5 or higher

ANDA WebView is installed on the UAP CPU module. You do not have to install any software on your workstation to run WebView.

3. From your web browser, enter the following Internet address to open the WebView logon page, shown in Figure 33:

http://<ip address>/

where <ip address> is the IP address that you configured for the active CPU.

For details about configuring the IP address, see “Configuring Ethernet Properties” in Chapter 2.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Selecting a Management Interface


Figure 33 ANDA WebView Logon Page

4. On the logon page, enter the following:

◆ In the User Name field, enter admin

◆ In the Password field, enter password#1

You should change the default password as soon as possible to increase security. For details about how to set up user accounts and change and assign passwords, see “Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView” in Chapter 6.

5. Click Log in to open the Chassis View page, shown in Figure 34.



Figure 34 ANDA WebView Chassis View Page

In a redundant CPU configuration, each CPU module has a different IP address. To run WebView successfully you must enter the IP address of the active CPU. To verify that you are running WebView via the active CPU module, click System/Database Status in the sidebar menu to open the System/Database Status page. If you have accessed WebView via the standby CPU module, this page displays an error message to that effect; restart the session with the IP address of the other (active) CPU module.

6. See Chapter 6 for details about how to configure and manage the UAP using ANDA WebView.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuration Basics


Configuration Basics

To configure the UAP, log on to the desired management interface (Craft, TL1, or ANDA WebView) as described earlier under “Selecting a Management Interface” and perform these basic steps:

1. Manage user accounts.

◆ Change the default administrator (admin) password.

◆ Set up user accounts.

◆ Delete user accounts.

2. Assign cards to the slots in the switch (set up an inventory).

3. Configure system information (Name, Date, Time, and Inactivity Timer).

4. Create and manage IDLC groups (IGs).

◆ Provision DTFs.

◆ Delete DTFs.

◆ View IDLC protection groups.

◆ View the CRV list (do not assign CRVs here; assign CRVs when provisioning DS0s on the facilities side).

5. Configure clocking.

6. Provision data transmission facilities.

◆ Provision DS1 facilities.

◆ Provision DS1 ports.

◆ Provision DS0 channels for DS1 ports (create CRVs during this process).

◆ Delete DS1 provisioning.

◆ Delete DS0s.

◆ Provision DS3 facilities.

◆ Provision DS3 ports.

◆ Provision DS1 ports for DS3 facilities.

◆ Provision DS0 channels for DS1 ports (create CRVs during this process).

◆ Delete DS0s for DS1s assigned to DS3 facilities.

7. Create and manage cross connections (if applicable).

◆ Create DS0 and DS1 cross connections.

◆ Delete DS0 and DS1 cross connections.

8. Configure protection switching (if applicable).

Configuration Basics 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


◆ Configure 1-to-n (up to 1-to-4) DS1 protection switching using a single 1:4 DS1 protection switch.

◆ Configure 1-to-n (up to 1-to-8) DS1 protection switching using two 1:4 DS1 protection switches daisy-chained together.

◆ Configure 1-to-n (up to 1-to-8) DS1 protection switching use a single 1:8 DS1 protection switch

◆ Perform manual DS1 protection switchovers and restores.

◆ Configure 1+1 DS3 protection switching.

9. Manage alarms.

◆ View lists of current and history alarms.

◆ Configure external alarms.

◆ Enable and disable fan and power supply alarms.

10. Monitor performance.

◆ Monitor DS1 link performance.

◆ Monitor DS3 link performance.

For details about how to configure and manage the UAP using the available management interfaces, see Chapter 4, “Using the Craft Interface to Manage the UAP” (Craft interface), Chapter 5, “Using the Craft Interface to Manage the UAP”, and Chapter 6 “Using the TL1 Messaging Interface to Manage the UAP”.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuration Basics



Using the Craft Interfaceto Manage the

UAP

This chapter tells you how to use the Craft Interface to manage the UAP. It contains the following sections:

◆ Logging on and Navigating the Craft Interface

◆ Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface

◆ Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface

◆ Configuring System Information Using the Craft Interface

◆ Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface

◆ Configuring Clocking Using the Craft Interface

◆ Provisioning Data Transmission Using the Craft Interface

◆ Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface

◆ Configuring Protection Switching Using the Craft Interface

◆ Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface

◆ Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface

◆ Setting Loopbacks

◆ Viewing Maintenance Information

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Logging on and Navigating the Craft Interface


Logging on and Navigating the Craft Interface

This section tells you how to log on to the Craft interface and provides general information about the Craft interface.

Logging on to the Craft Interface












craft

Any entry you make at the uap> prompt must be in all lowercase letters. Regardless of the median used to access the shelf, or the screen in view, typing ? brings up a list of shortcuts—abbreviated commands for each action available in that screen.

3. At the login> prompt, enter the default login name:

admin

4. At the password> prompt, enter the default password (password#1) to open the Craft interface main menu.

IMPORTANT: Save provisioned data (from the Provision menu, enter save provisioned data) each time you make a provisioning change and always keep a copy of the persistent database in a known backup directory in case you need to restore the database due to corruption. You should also save the configuration screen as a text file and keep a paper copy of your provisioning information for reference.

Navigating the Craft MenusYou move through the Craft interface menus by entering commands to open submenus and to display information screens or prompts to which you respond with configuration values. To move backwards through a series of menus, enter

Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


exit from each menu until you have backed out to the desired place in the menu hierarchy.

For example, to view current alarms, you enter alarms information from the main menu to open the Alarm Information menu, a screen that lists counts of the current alarms on the UAP, by slot number. To set the date, you enter system information from the main menu to open the System menu. From the System menu, you then enter date and time to open the Date and Time menu. From the Date and Time submenu, you enter date and respond to the prompt to set the date.

When entering Craft commands, you can abbreviate to the first three letters—the first two letters in the case of the ip address command. For example, you can enter sys to open the System menu from the main menu.

Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface

The UAP Craft interface supports the following classes, or groups, of users:

◆ Administrator — Users in this group can execute all system commands.

◆ Provisioner — Users in this group can execute all system commands, but they cannot change passwords.

◆ Tester — Users in this group can view, but not change, system information, view and reset the performance monitoring registers, configure and switch DS1 protection, view all alarm configurations, and set the ACO.

◆ Monitor — Users in this group cannot perform any provisioning; they have read-only access to system information, provisioning data, and performance monitoring data.

When you log on, the contents of the main menu varies, depending on which user group is associated with the logon name you used.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface


Table 16 lists the commands available to each of the user groups.

Managing user accounts involves the following tasks:

◆ Changing the default administrator (admin) password

◆ Adding and Editing user accounts

◆ Deleting user accounts

You must be logged on as an administrator to manage user accounts.

Changing the Default PasswordYou should change the default password as soon as possible for security. To change the default password, follow these steps:

1. From the main menu, enter sys to open the System menu.

2. From the System menu, enter use to open the Users Account menu. The Users Account menu lists the currently configured user accounts, by user number, and the user name and group associated with each user name.

3. From the Users Account menu, enter use to open the Users Account submenu.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a user number.

4. Enter 1 to open the Users Account submenu for the default admin user.

5. From the Users Account submenu, change the password for the default user name you used to log on to the UAP initially.

a. Enter nam.

The Craft Interface prompts you for a user name.

b. Enter the default administrator user name.

c. Enter pas.

The Craft Interface prompts you for a password.

d. Enter the new password. The cursor remains stationary as you enter the password. The password:

Table 16 UAP Craft Interface Commands Supported, by User Group

Command ADMINISTRATOR PROVISIONER TESTER MONITOR

system information

Yes Read Only Read Only Read Only

inventory Yes Yes No Read Only

provision Yes Yes No No

alarms info Yes Yes Yes Read Only

maintenance Yes Yes Yes No

Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


◆ Can contain a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 12 characters.

◆ Must start with a letter.

◆ Can contain any of the following characters:a-z, A-Z, 0-9, !, @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, or ,

◆ Is case-sensitive.

◆ Cannot contain a blank.

Adding and Editing User Accounts

The UAP supports up to 15 users; one user account is reserved for the default administrator user name you use to log on to the system initially. At least one administrator user account must be defined at all times.

To add or edit user accounts, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter use to open the Users Account menu. The Users Account menu lists the currently configured user accounts, by user number, and the user name and group associated with each user name.

3. From the Users Account menu, enter use to open the Users Account submenu.


4. Enter the number corresponding to the user account you want to add or edit to open the Users Account submenu for that user account.

5. From the Users Account submenu, configure the user name, password, and group.

a. Enter nam.

The Craft Interface prompts you for a user name.

b. Enter the desired user name. This name must be unique. It can contain up to 24 characters and can include a blank. If you are editing a user account, enter the user name for the account you want to edit.

c. Enter pas.

The Craft Interface prompts you for a password.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing User Accounts Using the Craft Interface


d. Enter the desired password. The cursor remains stationary when you type it. The password:



◆ Can contain any of the following characters:a-z, A-Z, 0-9, !, @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, or ,.



e. Enter gro.

The Craft Interface prompts you for a user group.

f. Enter the number corresponding to the name of the group you want to assign the user name: 4) ADMINISTRATOR, 3) PROVISIONER, 2) TESTER, or 1) MONITOR).

Deleting User AccountsTo delete a user account, follow these steps:

At least one administrator user account must be defined at all times.

To delete a user account from the Craft interface, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft Interface main menu, enter sys to open the System menu.

2. From the System menu, enter use to open the Users Account menu.

3. From the Users Account menu, enter use.


4. Enter the number corresponding to the user that you want to delete to open the Users Account submenu for the specified user.

5. Enter nam.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a username.

6. Press Return. Do not enter any characters.

7. From the Users Accounts submenu, enter exi to return to the Users Account menu. The user account for which you entered no name is now deleted.

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface

Before you can configure system information and provision facilities and IDLCs, you must set up an inventory of the cards installed in the shelf. When you set up an inventory, you confirm the physical configuration of your UAP by assigning cards logically to the slots in the shelf.

To set up an inventory using the Craft Interface, follow these steps:

1. From the main menu, select inv to open the Inventory menu. This menu lists the cards physically installed in the shelf (Physical) and the logically-assigned cards for each slot (Assigned).

2. From the Inventory menu, enter slo.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the slot number.

3. Enter the slot number for which you want to assign a card to open the Inventory Slot # submenu. The currently-assigned card type is listed at the top of the menu (Currently Assigned Plug-In)

4. From the Inventory Slot # submenu, enter ass.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the board type.

5. Enter the number corresponding to the board type you want to assign to the slot (1 for DS1X, or 2 for DS3X).

From the Inventory Slot# Submenu, you can also unassign boards, retrieve manufacturing and firmware information, and boot the firmware.

CAUTION: Booting the CPU firmware resets the shelf. Issue this command only if you are certain this is the course of action you want to take.

Unassigning CardsTo unassign a logically-assigned card, follow these steps:

1. From the main menu, select inv to open the Inventory menu. This menu lists the cards physically installed in the shelf (Physical) and the logically-assigned cards for each slot (Assigned).

2. From the Inventory menu, enter slo.


If the slot number you enter has no physically installed board, you will get an error message to that effect.

3. Enter the slot number for which you want to assign a card to open the Inventory Slot # submenu. The currently-assigned card type is listed at the top of the menu (Currently Assigned Plug-In)

4. From the Inventory Slot # submenu, enter una to unassign the assigned card type.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring System Information Using the Craft Interface


Configuring System Information Using the Craft Interface

Once you have set up an inventory of the boards in the shelf, you can view system status and configure the following system information:

◆ Equipment name

◆ Date and time

◆ IP address (view only; configure at bootup only)

◆ Inactivity timer

The following subsections provide further details about how to configure these types of system information using the Craft interface.

Viewing System StatusTo view system status for the UAP, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter sys to open the System Status menu. This menu lists the following system information:

◆ System board status (active and standby CPU module status)

◆ Database status

◆ Time at which the database was last saved

Assigning a Name to the UAPTo assign a name to the UAP, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter equ to open the Equipment Name menu.

3. From the Equipment Name menu, enter:

nam

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a name.

4. Enter the name which you want to assign to the UAP. The name can be up to 20 characters long, and it can contain alphanumeric and special characters. It is not case sensitive, and it can contain spaces. After you enter a name, the Craft interface returns you to the Equipment Name menu, where the name you entered is now displayed at the top.

Configuring System Information Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Setting the Date and TimeTo set the date and time, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter dat to open the Date and Time menu.

3. From the Date and Time menu, set the date and time.

a. Enter dat.

The Craft interface prompts you for the date.

b. Enter the date, in dd-mm-yyyy format.

c. Enter tim.

The Craft interface prompts you for the time.

d. Enter the time, in hh:mm:ss format.

Viewing the Shelf IP AddressFor this host software release, the IP address menu is a view-only menu; you must make all changes to Ethernet properties at bootup. Do not use the commands on the IP Address menu. For details about how to change the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway at bootup, see “Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity” in Chapter 2.

To view the current IP address information for the shelf, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter ip to open the IP Address menu.

Setting the Inactivity TimerUse the inactivity timer to specify the amount of time the Craft interface can be inactive before it will automatically log out users. If you are automatically logged out, provisioned data that has not been saved is not lost. You can log back on and save the provisioned data.

To configure the inactivity timer, follow these steps:


2. From the System menu, enter ina to open the Inactivity Timer menu.

3. From the Inactivity Timer menu, enter ina.

The Craft interface prompts you for the inactivity timer value.

4. Enter the desired inactivity timer value (1 to 30 minutes).

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface


Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface

An IDLC (Integrated Digital Loop Carrier) is a DLC (Digital Loop Carrier) system that has a direct digital interface to the LDS (Local Digital Switch). IDLC groups (IGs) are the digital transmission groups you can use within the switch. Release 1.0.0 supports three IGs.

Before you IDLCs and facilities, you should activate the fan alarm. For details, see “Enabling and Disabling Fan Alarms” later in this chapter.

To provision an IDLC using the Craft interface, follow these steps:

1. From the main menu, enter pro to open the Provision menu.

2. From the Provision menu, enter idl to open the Provision IDLC menu.

3. Enter sel.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter an IDLC number (1, 2, or 3).

4. Enter the desired IDLC number to open the Provision IDLC# menu.

If you enter the number of an IDLC that has not been provisioned, the Craft interface displays the following message before opening the Provision IDLC # menu:IDLC does not exist; creating ID LCIf you enter the number of an existing IDLC, the Provision IDLC# menu opens immediately.

5. From the Provision IDLC# menu, configure the digital transmission facilities.

a. Enter dig to open the IDLC# Provision Digital Transmission Facility menu. This menu lists the current configuration for the 28 DTFs on the selected IDLC.

b. From the IDLC# Provision Digital Transmission Facility menu, enter dtf.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DTF number (1-28).

c. Enter the desired DTF number to open the Provision Digital Transmission Facility submenu.

d. From the Provision Digital Transmission Facility submenu, enter add.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a slot number.

The IDLC side and the facility side must be on separate cards.

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


e. Enter the desired slot number.

Do not enter slot 11 or slot 12—these slots are reserved for the CPU boards.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a port number.

f. Enter the number of the DS1 or DS3 port that you want to provision.

The Craft interface returns you to the Provision Digital Transmission Facility submenu, where the selected slot and port are now listed for the DTF.

A provisioned digital transmission facility is assigned a service status of IS. If there is no service on the board, however, the system switches the service status to OOS and declares a major alarm. To avoid this, you can manually switch the service status to OOS by entering the ser command from the Provision Digital Transmission Facility submenu and responding to the prompt.

g. Repeat steps 4a to 4f as desired to provision additional digital transmission facilities.

6. Return to the Provision menu and enter sav to save your configuration.

Deleting IDLCs

To delete an IDLC, follow these steps:



3. Enter sel.


4. Enter the number of the IDLC you want to delete to open the Provision IDLC# menu.

5. From the Provision IDLC# menu, Enter del.

The Craft interface prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the IDLC.

6. Enter y to delete the IDLC.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the Craft Interface


Viewing CRV ValuesTo view a table of CRV values, follow these steps:


2. From the Provision menu, enter idl to open the IDLC menu.

3. Enter sel.


4. Enter the number of the IDLC for which you want to view CRV numbers to open the Provision IDLC# menu.

5. From the Provision IDLC# menu, enter crv.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the range of CRVs for which you want to display values.

6. Enter the first number in the range, then respond to the prompt to enter the last number in the range, or enter a to display all CRV values. The Display Call Reference Value menu opens. This menu lists the current settings for all configured CRVs. If no CRVs are configured, the table indicates this.

The Display Call Reference Value table is for informational purposes only. Do not add, change, or delete CRVs from the Provision IDLC menus. To create and delete CRVs use the Provision Facility menus, as described under earlier in this chapter.

Viewing Current IDLC InformationTo view a table of the current link configuration for the three IDLC groups, follow these steps:



3. Enter dis to open the View Path Protection menu. This menu provides a table listing the DTF, slot, port, EOC, and TMC for the primary and secondary channels of each of the three IDLC groups.

Configuring Clocking Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Viewing IDLC Protection GroupsTo view IDLC protection groups, follow these steps:



3. Enter sel.


4. Enter the number of the IDLC for which you want to view protection groups to open the Provision IDLC# menu.

5. From the Provision IDLC# menu, enter pro to view the IDLC Protection Groups menu. This menu lists the DTF, path, and operation (in service or out of service) for the primary and secondary channels of each of the three IDLC groups.

Configuring Clocking Using the Craft Interface

Configuring the clock for the UAP involves the following tasks:

◆ Assigning up to two reference clock sources (in addition to the network clock and the internal clock).

◆ Specifying the timing mode: an ordered list that indicates the priority of the clock sources.

To configure the clock for the UAP using the Craft Interface, follow these steps:

1. From the Provision menu, enter clo to open the Clock menu.

This menu lists the current status fir the network clock, reference clock A, reference clock B, and the internal clock. I also lists the current timing mode and the location (slot and port) of each of reference clock sources. If you have not assigned the clock sources for reference clock A or reference clock B, as described below in steps 2 and 3, the LOCATION for these clocks is listed as NOT ASSIGNED.

2. Designate the reference A clock source.

a. From the Clock menu enter ref a.

The Craft interface prompts you for the slot number of a DS1 or DS3 board.

b. Enter the slot number in which the board you want to use as the clocking source is installed.

The Craft interface prompts you for the port number on the selected board.

c. Enter the port number for the port you want to use as a timing source.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Provisioning Data Transmission Using the Craft Interface


3. Designate the reference B clock source.

a. From the Clock menu enter ref b.

The Craft interface prompts you for the slot number of a DS1 or DS3 board.

b. Enter the slot number in which the board you want to use as the clocking source is installed.

The Craft interface prompts you for the port number on the selected board.

c. Enter the port number for the port you want to use as a timing source.

4. Specify the timing mode. For example, a timing mode of REFA, REFB, NET, INT indicates that the UAP will begin by using the clock source designated as reference clock A as its timing source. If reference clock A fails, the UAP will switch over to reference clock B. If reference clock B fails, the UAP will switch over to the network clock, and if the network clock fails, the UAP will switch over to the internal clock.

a. From the Clock menu, enter mod.

The Craft interface prompts you to choose one of the following timing modes:

AUTO 1 — REFA, REFB, NET, INTAUTO 2 — REFA, REFB, INT, NETAUTO 3 — NET REFA, REFB, INTAUTO 4 — NET, INT, REFA, REFB

b. Enter the number corresponding to the timing mode you want to select (1, 2, 3, or 4).

Provisioning Data Transmission Using the Craft Interface

Provisioning data transmission involves the following tasks:

◆ Provisioning DS1 and DS3 ports

◆ Configuring DS0 channels

◆ Defining CRVs

Before you provision IDLCs and facilities, you should enable the fan alarm. For details, see “Enabling and Disabling Fan Alarms” later in this chapter.

The following subsections tell you how to provision DS1 and DS3 ports. For details about how to configure DS0 channels and define CRVs, see “Configuring DS0 Channels” and “Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)” later in this chapter.

IMPORTANT: Each time you complete the provisioning on a slot, return to the Provision menu and enter save provisioned data to save the provisioned data in the persistent database. For this host software release, only traffic transmission data is

Provisioning Data Transmission Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


considered as provisioned data. In future releases, the clock and header information will also be included in the provisioned data.

Provisioning DS1 and PortsTo provision DS1 ports, follow these steps:


2. From the Provision menu, enter facility.


You must assign a board to the slot, as described earlier under “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface,” before you can provision that slot. If you enter a slot number for which you have not assigned a board, you will get an unknown board type error. If this happens, go to the Inventory menu and assign a board to the slot, then return to the Provision menu to provision the DS1 facilities.

3. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu for that slot. This menu displays a table of configured parameters for the DS1s on the selected slot. This table is blank until you create the DS1 ports.


4. Enter cre.




5. Enter the port number of the DS1 port you want to create. You can create up to 12 DS1s for each slot equipped with a DS1 card.

The Craft interface displays a message that the specified DS1 # is being created then returns you to the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu, which now displays the default configuration settings for the port you created.

6. Enter por.


7. Enter the number of the port for which you want to change the configured parameters to open the Provision Slot# Port# T1 Port submenu. This menu lists the current settings for the specified port.

If you have not created the DS1 port, as described in steps 3 and 4, you will get an error message when you enter a port number. You must create the DS1 before you can provision it.

8. From the Provision Slot# Port# T1 Port submenu, configure the DS1 port parameters for the specified port by entering the following commands and responding to the prompts:

fra — Framing type:

cod — Line coding: AMI, AMIZCS, or B8ZS.

pm — Enable or disable performance monitoring.

lbo — Line build out: 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-532, or 532-655 feet.

ser — Service: the operational status of the port: IS (in service) or OOS (out of service).

9. Repeat steps 3-7 as desired to configure additional DS1s.



You can also copy the configuration information from a provisioned DS1 to another port, all ports, or a range of port:

a. From the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu, enter cop.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the DS1 port from which you want to copy.

b. Enter the number corresponding to your choice.

◆ If you select to copy to a single port, the Craft interface prompts you to enter a port number.

◆ If you select to copy to a range of channels, the Craft interface prompts you to enter the port number of the first and last ports in the range.

◆ If you select to copy to all channels on the port, the Craft interface prompts you to enter a.

c. Enter the port number of the DS1 to which you want to copy, the first port in the range, or a.

Copying DS1 provisioning information to all DS1s may take a few minutes. Do not make additional keyboard strokes while the copying is taking place. When the copying is complete the Craft interface returns you to the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu, where the newly-provisioned ports are now listed.

You can now provision up to 24 DS0 channels for every DS1 that you have configured. For details, see “Configuring DS0 Channels” later in this chapter. You can then define CRVs for the DS0s that you configure. For details, see “Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)” later in this chapter.

Provisioning DS3 PortsTo provision DS3 ports, follow these steps:


2. From the Provision menu, enter fac.


You must assign a board to the slot, as described earlier under “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the Craft Interface,” before you can provision that slot with a DS3 circuit. If you enter a slot number for which you have not assigned a board, you will get an unknown board type error. If this happens, go to the Inventory menu and assign a board to the slot, then return to the Provision menu to provision the DS3 facilities.

3. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# DS3 Facility menu for that slot.




4. From the Provision Slot# Facility menu, enter cir.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a name for the DS3 circuit.

5. Enter a circuit name of up to 20 characters.

6. Configure the DS3 parameters for the circuit by entering the following commands and responding to the prompts:

lin — Line format: C-Bit or M13.

cod — Framing code: Bipolar or Unipolar.

cab — DS3 cable length: Normal or Long (over 450 feet).

pm — Disable or enable performance monitoring.

ala — Disable or enable alarm generation.

fea — Disable or enable FEAC (far end alarm signal status code) alarms. This parameter is applicable only if you have configured the line as C-Bit.

thr — Display the current performance registers for both 15-minute and 24-hour intervals. For details about how to change the performance registers, see “Changing the Performance Registers” later in this section.

ds1 — Open the Provision Slot # DS3 T1 facility menu, which displays the current parameters for the DS3 port’s DS1 interfaces at the UAP backplane. From this submenu, you can create up to 28 DS1s for each slot equipped with a DS3 module. For details about creating DS1s for a DS3 module, see “Creating DS1s for a DS3 Module” later in this section.

Creating DS1s for a DS3 ModuleYou can create up to 28 DS1s for each DS3 card.(as opposed to 12 DS1s for each DS1 card). To create DS1s for a DS3 card, follow these steps:

1. From the Provision Slot# Facility menu, enter ds1 to open the Provision Slot # DS3 T1 facility menu.

2. From the Provision Slot # DS3 T1 facility menu enter cre.


3. Enter the port number of the DS1 port you want to create. You can create up to 28 DS1s for each slot equipped with a DS3 card.

The Provision Slot# DS3 T1 Facility menu reappears, now displaying the default configuration settings for the port you created.

4. Enter por.


5. Enter the number of the port for which you want to change the configured parameters to open the Provision Slot# DS3 Port# T1 Port submenu. This menu lists the current settings for the specified port.



If you have not created the DS1 port, as described in steps 2 and 3, you will get an error message when you enter a port number. You must create the DS1 before you can provision it.

6. From the Provision Slot# Port# Port submenu, configure the DS1 port parameters for the specified port by entering the following commands and responding to the prompts:

dso — Opens the Provision Slot# DS3 Port# DS0 Facility menu, from which you can configure DS0 channels for the DS1 ports provisioned on the DS3 interface.

ser — Puts the DS1 in service or out of service.

fra — Framing type:

7. Repeat steps 2-6 as desired to configure additional DS1s for the DS3 module.

You can now provision up to 24 DS0 channels for every DS1 that you have configured. For details, see “Configuring DS0 Channels” later in this chapter. You can then define CRVs for the DS0s that you configure. For details, see “Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)” later in this chapter.

Changing the Performance RegistersTo change the DS3 performance registers, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Use extreme care when changing DS3 performance monitoring thresholds. These values must match your switch maintenance requirement. If you set the thresholds too low, an inordinate number of alarms will be generated. If you set the thresholds too high, alarms will not be generated in time for you to correct the problem before the line goes out of service.




3. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# DS3 Facility menu for that slot.

4. From the Provision Slot# DS3 Facility submenu, enter thr to display the current registers.

5. Enter cha.

The Craft interface prompts you to select whether you want to change a 15-minute interval or a 24-hour interval register.

6. Enter the number corresponding to the length of interval for which you want to change performance registers.

The Craft interface prompts you to select the threshold you want to change.



7. Enter the number corresponding to the register you want to change (1-14).

You can set thresholds for the following performance monitoring counters:

PCV — The number of P-bit coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

PES — The number of P-bit error seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

PSES — The number of P-bit severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CCV — The number of C-bit coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CES — The number of C-bit errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CSES — The number of C-bit severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LCV — The number of line coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LES — The number of line errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LSES — The number of line severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

SEFS — The number of severely-errored framing seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

AISS — The number alarm indication signal seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

UAS — The number of unavailable seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LOSS — The number of loss of signal seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LOFS — The number of loss of frame seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

8. Enter the new value for the performance register from the listed range.

Configuring DS0 ChannelsYou can configure DS0 channels for DS1s provisioned on either DS1 or DS3 interfaces. To configure DS0 channels, follow these steps:





2. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# Facility menu for that slot.


3. Enter port number.


4. Enter the number of the port for which you want to provision DS0s to open the Provision Slot# Port# T1 Port submenu for that port.

If you have not created the DS1 or DS3 port, as described under “Provisioning DS1 and Ports,” the Craft interface displays an error message when you enter a port number. You must create the DS1 or DS3 before you can provision DS0 channels on it.

If the port you select is already connected to an IG, the Craft interface displays an error message to that effect.

5. From the Provision Slot# Port# T1 Port submenu, enter ds0 to open the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, from which you can configure the DS0s for the DS1 or DS3. The Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu displays a table of configured parameters for the channels on the selected port. This table is blank until you create the DS0 channels.

6. Enter cre.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DS0 channel number.

7. Enter the number of the DS0 channel you want to create.

The Craft interface displays a message indicating that the selected DS0# is being created then prompts you to enter an IG number.

8. Enter the number of the IDLC group to which you want to connect this channel.

The Craft interface returns you to the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, where the default configuration settings for the channel you created are now displayed.

9. Enter cha.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DS0 number.

10. Enter the number of the DS0 for which you want to change the configured parameters to open the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu. This menu lists the current settings for the specified DS0 channel.

If you have not created the DS0 channel, as described in steps 6 and 7, you will get an error message when you enter a channel number. You must create the DS0 before you can configure it.



11. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu, configure the DS0 channel parameters for the specified channel by entering the following commands and responding to the prompts:

ser — Service status: IS (in service) or OOS (out of service).

signaling — Signaling type: FXS/LS (FXS loop start), FXS/GS (FXS ground start), FXO/LS (FXO loop start), FXO/GS (FXO ground start).

rbs — Robbed bit signaling: Transparent, A Rob bit, AB Rob bit, or ABCD Rob bit.

If the signaling for the port on which the DS0 is being provisioned is set to SF (D4), you cannot set the rbs to ABCD Rob bit.

crv— Assign a CRV number. For details, see “Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)” later in this chapter.

12. Repeat steps 6-11 as desired to configure additional DS0s.You can also copy the configuration information from a provisioned DS0:

a. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, enter copy.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the DS0 channel from which you want to copy.

b. Enter the channel number of the DS0 channel from which you want to copy.

The Craft interface prompts you to specify whether you want to copy to a single channel, a range of channels, or all channels.

c. Enter the number corresponding to your choice.

◆ If you select to copy to a single channel, the Craft interface prompts you to enter a channel number.

◆ If you select to copy to a range of channels, the Craft interface prompts you to enter the channel number of the first and last channels in the range.

◆ If you select to copy to all channels on the port, the Craft interface prompts you to enter a.



d. Enter the channel number of the DS0 to which you want to copy, the first channel in the range, or a.

The Craft interface prompts you to specify how the CRV numbers will be incremented as the DS0 is copied.

e. Enter 1 to auto-increment the CRV value; each time the DS0 is copied, the CRV is incremented by one. Enter 2 to be prompted for the CRV number for each DS0 to which the source DS0 is copied.

We suggest that you check the CRV list (see “Viewing CRV Values” earlier in this chapter for details) to be sure that the CRV numbers that will be created automatically using copy command are not already assigned. If you set the range of CRVs to be assigned automatically in such a way that newly-created CRVs will duplicate existing CRV numbers, the duplicate number(s) are not assigned. For example, consider a scenario in which you are using the Save multiple check box to provision a range of 12 channels and you designate 101 as the first CRV number. If no CRVs are assigned in the range 101-112, then all 12 new CRVs will be created. If CRVs 102 and 103 are already assigned, however, new CRVs will not overwrite the existing ones, and only 10 new CRVs will be created.

The Craft interface displays a message that the DS0 is being copied, then returns you to the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, where the newly-provisioned channels are now displayed.

Defining Call Reference Values (CRVs)Call reference values (CRVs) are the reference numbers that identify the phone line to which the switch side line will be connected.

To create a CRV, follow these steps:

You can also create CRVs automatically when you provision DS0s. See “Configuring DS0 Channels” earlier in this chapter for details.



2. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# Facility menu for that slot.

3. From the Provision Slot# Facility menu, enter por.


4. Enter the port number of the DS1 or DS3 port for which you want to create a CRV to open the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu.

5. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, enter ds0 to open the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu.

6. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu. enter cha.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DS0 channel number.



You must create the DS0 channel (see “Configuring DS0 Channels” earlier in this chapter for details) before you can assign a CRV to it.

7. Enter the number of the DS0 for which you want to create a CRV to open the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu.

8. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility submenu, enter crv.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a CRV value.

9. Enter the desired call reference value, in the range 1-2048.

You can now use the service command on the Provision Slot# Port# DS0# Facility submenu to take the CRV in and out of service.

Deleting DS0s, DS1s, and DS3sThis section describes how to delete CRVs, DS0 channels, and ports (DS1 and DS3). You should perform these procedures in this order:

1. Take any affiliated circuits out of service.

2. Delete the DS0(s).

When you delete a DS0, you delete the CRVs assigned to it.

3. Delete the DS1 or DS3 port.

Deleting DS0 Channels

Before you can delete a DS1 or DS3 port, you must delete all DS0s configured for it. To delete a DS0 channel, follow these steps:

Before you can delete a DS0 channel, the service status of the DS0 must be Out of Service. If the DS0 is In Service, you must change the service status to Out of Service before you can delete the DS0.



2. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu for that slot.

3. From the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu, enter por.


4. Enter the port number of the DS1 port for which you want to delete a DS0 to open the Provision Slot# Port# T1 Port menu. This menu lists all the DS0 channels for the selected DS1 port.

5. From the Provision Slot# Port# DS0 Facility menu, enter del.




6. Enter the number of the DS0 you want to delete to delete the channel.

Deleting DS1 or DS3 Ports

Before you can delete a DS1 or DS3 port, the service status of the port must be Out of Service. If the port is In Service, you must change the service status to Out of Service before you can delete the port.

To delete a DS1 or DS3 port, follow these steps:

CAUTION: If there are no DS0 CRVs or cross-connects on the DS1 or DS3 port, you can delete the port simply by following the procedure in this subsection. If there are mixed CRVs or DS0 cross-connects on the port, however, you must delete every CRV and DS0 cross-connect completely before you delete the DS1 or DS3 port.



2. Enter the desired slot number to open the Provision Slot# T1 Facility menu for that slot.

3. From the Provision Slot# Facility menu, enter del.


4. Enter the number of the DS1 or DS3 port you want to delete to delete the specified port.

Removing Unwanted DS1s, DS3s, or DS0s from the DatabaseIf you create any DS1s or DS0s in error, you should delete this unwanted provisioning from the persistent database.

To remove unwanted provisioning from the persistent database:Remove the DS1s, DS3s, and/or DS0s one by one, saving the provisioned data (from the Provision menu enter sav) after each removal.

Remember to wait for the Craft Interface to return the Flash Memory Completed message each time you save the provisioned data.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface


Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface

You can cross-connect a DS1, a DS3, or group of DS0s from any DS1 or DS3 on the UAP to any other DS1, DS3, or group of DS0s—as long as the payload on both sides matches. The following subsections describe how to provision DS0 and DS1/DS3 cross connections using the Craft interface.

Do not create cross connections with the create command on the Provision Facility Slot# menu.

Provisioning DS0 Cross ConnectionsTo provision DS0 cross connections, follow these steps:

1. From the Provision menu, enter cro to open the Provision Cross Connection menu.

2. From the Provision Cross Connection menu, enter cre to open the Create Cross Connection menu.

3. From the Create Cross Connection menu, enter ds0.


4. Enter the slot number for the DS1 or DS3 that you want to use as the first side of the cross connection.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DS1 or DS3 port number.

5. Enter the port number for the DS1 that you want to use as the first side of the cross connection.


6. Enter the number for the DS0 that you want to use as the first side of the cross connection to open the Provision DS0 Cross Connection menu.

7. From the Provision DS0 Cross Connection menu, enter add.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the destination slot number.

8. Enter the slot number for the slot that you want to use as the second side of the cross connection.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the destination DS1 number.

9. Enter the port number for the DS1 or DS3 that you want to use as the second side of the cross connection.


Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


10. Enter the number for the DS0 that you want to use as the second side of the cross connection.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the connection type (data or voice).

11. Enter the number corresponding to the type of cross connection you want to create and return to the Provision DS0 Cross Connection menu, where the cross connection that you just created is now listed.

Provisioning DS1 Cross ConnectionsTo provision DS1 or DS3 cross connections, follow these steps:


2. From the Provision Cross Connection menu, enter cre to open the Create Cross Connection menu.

3. From the Create Cross Connection menu, enter ds1.


4. Enter the slot number for the DS1 or DS3 port that you want to use as the first side of the cross connection.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a DS1 or DS3 port number.

5. Enter the number for the DS1 or DS3 port that you want to use as the first side of the cross connection to open the Provision DS1 Cross Connection menu.

6. From the Provision DS1 Cross Connection menu, enter add.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the destination slot number.

7. Enter the slot number for the slot that you want to use as the second side of the cross connection.


8. Enter the number for the DS1 or DS3 port that you want to use as the second side of the cross connection.

If the selected port is already part of a cross connection, the Craft interface displays a message to that effect.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the connection type.

9. Enter 1 to select data as the connection type and return to the Provision DS0 Cross Connection menu, where the cross connection that you just created is now listed.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Cross Connections Using the Craft Interface


Viewing Existing Cross ConnectionsTo view a table of existing DS0, and DS1 cross connections, follow these steps:


2. From the Provision Cross Connection menu, enter sho.


3. Enter the slot number for which you want to view cross connections to open a table listing all cross connections on that slot.

For each cross connection, the table lists the following information:

SOURCE — The source DS0 (slot# - port# - channel#) or DS1/DS3 (slot# - port#)

DESTINATION — The destination DS0 (slot# - port# - channel#) or DS1/DS3 (slot# - port#)

TYPE — The connection type: DS0 Data, DS0 Voice, DS1 Data, or DS1 Voice.

STATE — The status of the cross-connection: Connected or Disconnected.

Deleting Cross ConnectionsTo delete a cross connection, follow these steps:

CAUTION: While you can create a cross connection with a single command from the Provision Facility Slot# Port# DS0# CRV submenu, when you delete a cross connection you must perform these two steps in order: 1) Delete the DS0 or DS1 cross connection, as described in this section and 2) Delete the affiliated DS0 channel or DS1/DS3 port as described under “Deleting DS0 Channels” and “Deleting DS1 or DS3 Ports” earlier in this chapter.


2. From the Provision Cross Connection menu, enter del to open the Delete Cross Connection menu.

3. From the Delete cross connection menu, delete a DS0 cross connection.

a. Enter ds0.


b. Enter the slot number of the DS0 cross connection you want to delete.


c. Enter the DS1 or DS3 port number for the DS0 cross connection you want to delete.

Configuring Protection Switching Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02



d. Enter the DS0 number of the DS0 cross connection you want to delete to delete the cross connection.

4. From the Delete cross connection menu, delete a DS1 cross connection.

a. Enter ds1.


b. Enter the slot number of the DS1 cross connection you want to delete.


c. Enter the DS1 or DS3 port number for the cross connection you want to delete to delete the DS1 cross connection.

5. Delete the affiliated DS0 channel or DS1/DS3 port as described under “Deleting DS0 Channels” and “Deleting DS1 or DS3 Ports” earlier in this chapter.

Configuring Protection Switching Using the Craft Interface

The UAP supports two types of protection switching:

◆ 1-to-N DS1 protection switching — via the 1:8 or 1:4 DS1 protection switch

◆ 1-plus-1 DS3 protection switching — via a DS3 Y connector.

This section describes how to use the Craft interface to configure the UAP for the following protection switching scenarios:

◆ DS1 protection switching (1 to N) using either a single 1:4 DS1 protection switch or a single 1:8 DS1 protection switch

◆ DS1 protection switching (1 to N) using two 1:4 DS1 protection switches daisy-chained together to provide 1:8 protection.

◆ DS3 protection switching (1 plus 1)

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring Protection Switching Using the Craft Interface


Configuring DS1 Protection Switchingwith a Single DS1 Protection SwitchFor the purposes of these instructions, consider an example configuration in which the boards have been installed in the UAP as indicated in Table 17 and the DS1 protection switch is set physically at #1. For details about setting the DS1 address, see “Step 5: Connect Power and Verify Front Panel LEDs” in Chapter 2.

To configure the UAP for DS1 protection switching using a single 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 protection switch, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft interface main menu, enter mai to open the Maintenance menu.

2. From the Maintenance menu, enter fac to open the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu. This menu features a table listing the following information for each UAP application slot:

Box# — The DS1 protection switch box number.

Port — If the card in the slot is connected to the DS1 protection switch, this column indicates the protection switch DS1 OUT port to which it is connected: 1, 2, 3, 4, or SPARE for the 1:4 DS1 protection switch; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or SPARE for the 1:8 DS1 protection switch.

Switched — Indicates whether or not a card connected to the DS1 protection switch has been switched. Additionally, the entry for the spare board lists Active in this column when a board has switched to the spare.

3. Enter con.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the switch type: 1toN or 1plus1.

4. Enter 1 to select 1toN switching and open the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu. This menu features a table that lists up to six DS1 protection switches and the UAP slots to which the DS1 OUT ports on the switches are connected.

5. Assign the protection boards.

a. Enter ass.

Table 17 Sample Board Assignment for Configuring Protection Switching

UAP SlotPort Connection at DS1 protection switch Designator

1 1 DS1 Board 1

2 2 DS1 Board 2

3 3 DS1 Board 3

4 4 DS1 Board 4

5 Spare Spare Board (Protection DS1)



The Craft interface prompts you to enter the DS1 protection box number.

b. Enter the DS1 protection box number (1 for the purposes of this example).

If no DS1 protection switch with the number you enter has been installed, the Craft interface displays the following error message:Protection Switch Box not existing

The Craft interface prompts you to enter the input port number.

c. Enter the number of the input port on the protection box (1-4 for ports connected to protected boards; 5 for the spare port connected to the board providing protection; 1 for the purposes of this example).


d. Enter the number of the UAP slot that is connected to the DS1 protection switch input port you specified in step 5c (1 for the purposes of this example). The slot number you enter is now listed in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu and menu.

You cannot assign the same UAP DS1 card to different protection switch input ports.

The card must be logically provisioned (inventory -> slot number -> assign board) before you can configure protection switching for it. If you enter a number corresponding to a slot to which a DS1 card has not been logically assigned, the Craft interface displays the following error message:Target board mismatched

e. Repeat steps 5a-5d for the other protection switch input port / UAP slot combinations. Assign the board you want to use for protection (the spare board) to the SPARE port.

Since the UAP’s protection switching feature is designed to protect facilities, not the switch, we recommend that you do not use an IDLC slot in protection switch.

After you have assigned the protection boards, your assignments are listed in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.

Configuring DS1 Protection Switchingwith Multiple 1:4 DS1 Protection SwitchesTo configure the UAP for DS1 protection switching using multiple 1:4 DS1 protection switches (either configured individually or daisy-chained together), follow these steps:

1. Configure protection switching (assign the input ports and spare port to the desired slots) for the first DS1 protection switch.

a. From the Craft interface main menu, enter mai to open the Maintenance menu.



b. From the Maintenance menu, enter fac to open the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu. This menu features a table listing the following information for each UAP application slot:




c. Enter con.


d. Enter 1 to select 1toN switching and open the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu. This menu features a table that lists which UAP slots are assigned to which input port for each DS1 protection switch. The number 0 indicates that no board has been assigned to that input port. N/A indicates either that the protection switch is a 1:4 rather than a 1:8 box, and that ports 5-8 are not available or that no protection switch with this number has been installed.



2. Assign the protection boards for the first DS1 protection switch.

a. Enter assign port and slot.


b. Enter the box number of the first DS1 protection switch.

If no DS1 protection switch with the number you enter has been installed, the Craft interface displays the following error message:Protection Switch Box not existing

c. Enter the number of the input port on the protection box (1-4 for ports connected to protected boards; 5 for the spare port connected to the board providing protection; 1 for the purposes of this example).


d. Enter the number of the UAP slot that is connected to the DS1 protection switch input port you specified in step 5c (1 for the purposes of this example). The slot number you enter is now listed in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu and menu.

You cannot assign the same UAP DS1 card to different protection switch input ports.


e. Repeat steps 5a-5d for the other protection switch input port / UAP slot combinations. Assign the board you want to use for protection (the spare board) to input port 5.


3. From the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu, enter ass.


4. Enter the box number of the second DS1 protection switch.

The Craft interface displays the following prompt:

This PS box will be in Daisy-Chain?

5. Enter 1 to daisy-chain the DS1 protection switches or 2 to configure them individually.



6. Enter the number of the input port on the protection box (1-4 for ports connected to protected boards; 5 for the spare port connected to the board providing protection; 1 for the purposes of this example).


7. Enter the number of the UAP slot that is connected to the DS1 protection switch input port you specified in step 5c. The slot number you enter is now listed in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu and menu.

You cannot assign the same UAP DS1 card to difference protection switch input ports.


8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the other protection switch input port / UAP slot combinations. Assign the board you want to use for protection (the spare board) to input port 5.


9. Repeat steps 3-8 for additional DS1 protection switches.

After you have assigned the protection boards, your assignments are listed in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.



Unassigning Protection BoardsTo remove a DS1 board from the protection switching scenario, use the unassign port and slot command on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu:


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter fac to open the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu.

3. Enter con.


4. Enter 1 to select 1toN switching and open the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.

5. Unassign protection boards as desired.

a. From the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu, enter una.


b. Enter the DS1 protection box number for which you want to remove a protection board.


c. Enter the number of the input port on the protection box for which you want to remove a board.

d. Repeat steps 5a-5c for the other protection switch input ports that you want to unassign.

After you have unassigned protection boards, your changes are reflected in the table on the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.



Editing DS1 Protection Switching AssignmentsTo edit a protection switching assignment, you must remove (unassign) the board and then assign it again as desired.

For example, consider a scenario in which protection boards have been assigned as follows:

In this example, board 3 has been inadvertently assigned to the wrong protection switch box. To correct this error, you would follow these steps:

1. From the Protection Switch Maintenance submenu, enter una.


2. Enter 2 (the DS1 protection box from which you want to remove board 3).


3. Enter 3 (the input port on the protection box from which you want to board 3).

The entry for Box #2, Port #3 should return to 0.

4. Assign board #3 correctly to Box #1, port #3 using the procedure described earlier in step 5 under “Configuring DS1 Protection Switching with a Single DS1 Protection Switch.”

Box# Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Spare

1 1 2 0 4 5

2 0 0 3 0 0



Switching to and Restoring from Protection ModeA protected DS1 board may switch to protection mode automatically due to board failure, or you can restore it from protection mode manually.

Table 18 describes several common scenarios in which a board switches to and from protection mode. The subsections following the table describe how to manually switch a board to and restore a board from protection mode.

Manually Switching a Board to Protected ModeTo initiate a manual switch to protection mode, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Be sure that the DS1 protection switch is connected to the UAP before issuing the switch to spare port command. If you initiate a switchover when the DS1 protection switch is not connected, you will lose all the data on the board from which you are switching.



3. From the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu, enter swi.


Table 18 DS1 Protection Mode Switchover Scenarios

Initial Condition Action End Result

Board 1 is protected Board is manually switched to protection mode

Switch to spare board is in effect

Board 1 is protected Board 1 is removed Switch to spare board is in effect

Board 1 is protected Board 1 is manually restored

Board 1 will restore

Board 1 is manually switched into protection mode and is installed in shelf

The spare (protecting board) is removed

Board 1 will restore

Board 1 is protected but is not installed in shelf.

The spare (protecting board) is removed

Board 1 will not restore

Boards 1 and 2 are protected and installed in shelf. Board 1 is manually switched to protection mode

Board 2 is either removed from the shelf or an attempt to manually switch is made

Protection switch to board 2 will occur

Board 1 is protected but is not present in shelf. Board 2 is protected and present in shelf

Board 2 is either removed from the shelf or an attempt to manually switch to protection mode is made

Protection switch to board 2 will not occur



4. Enter the slot number for the board that you want to switch into protection mode. The Switched column on the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu now lists To <n> (where <n> is the slot number that has been configured as the spare) for the slot you specified, indicating that the specified board has been switched to the spare board. Additionally, the Switched column for the spare board lists Active, indicating that a board is switched to the spare.

If you attempt to perform a manual switchover, and the card in the slot designated as the spare is not physically installed, the Craft interface displays the following error message:Protection slot in troublePress <Enter> to continue

Restoring a Board from Protection ModeTo restore a board from protection mode, follow these steps:



3. From the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu, enter res.


4. Enter the slot number for the board that you want to switch out of protection mode.

If you enter a slot number for a card that is not protected (including the slot number assigned to the spare), the Craft interface displays the following error message:Target board is not protectedPress <Enter> to continue

The Switched column on the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu now lists No for the slot you specified, indicating that the specified board is no longer switched to protection mode. Additionally, the Switched column for the spare board lists No, indicating that no boards are switched to the spare.



Configuring the UAP for DS3 Protection SwitchingTo configure the UAP for DS3 protection switching, follow these steps:


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter fac to open the Facility Protection Switch Maintenance menu. This menu features a table listing the following information for each UAP application slot:




3. Enter con.


4. Enter 2 to select 1plus1 switching and open the 1 Plus 1 Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.

5. From the 1 Plus 1 Protection Switch Maintenance submenu, enter ass.

The Craft interface prompts you enter a slot number.

6. Enter the slot number of the board you want to protect (the active board).

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a spare port number.

7. Enter the slot number of the board you want to use to provide the protection (the standby board).

The Craft interface returns you to the 1 Plus 1 Protection Switch Maintenance submenu, where your protection switching configuration is now listed.



Editing DS3 Protection Switching AssignmentsTo edit a protection switching assignment, you must remove (unassign) the board and then assign it again as desired.

To unassign DS3 protection switching, follow these steps:



3. Enter con.


4. Enter 2 to select 1plus1 switching and open the 1 Plus 1 Protection Switch Maintenance submenu.

5. From the 1 Plus 1 Protection Maintenance submenu, enter una.

The Craft interface prompts you for a slot number.

6. Enter the slot number of the protected board from which you want to remove protection switching.

Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface

Using the Craft interface, you can enable and disable power supply and fan alarms, view current and history alarms, configure external alarms, and cut off the audible alarm (ACO). For details about connecting the alarm output relay box, see “Connecting the Alarm Output Relay Box” in Chapter 2.

You now configure external alarms and enable and disable power and fan alarms from the Craft Interface Alarm Information menu. In previous releases, you configured alarms from the Provision menu.

Enabling and Disabling Power Supply AlarmsEnable the power supply alarms to direct the system to generate an alarm in the event of a power supply failure. Disable the power supply alarms to direct the system not to generate an alarm in the event of a power supply failure. We recommend that you enable the power supply alarms.

To enable or disable the power supply alarms, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft main menu enter ala to open the Alarm Information menu. This menu lists the number of critical, major, and minor alarms on each slot of the UAP.

2. From the Alarm Information menu, enter pow to open the -48V Power Supply Information menu. This menu displays the current status of the alarms for power supplies A and B.

3. From the -48V Power Supply Information menu, enter cha to enable a disabled power supply alarm or to disable an enabled power supply alarm.

The Craft interface displays one of the following prompts, depending on whether you are enabling or disabling the power supply alarm:

Do you want to enable Power A alarm (y/n)

Do you want to disable Power A alarm (y/n)

4. Enter y to enable or disable the power supply A alarm.

The Craft interface displays one of the following prompts, depending on whether you are enabling or disabling the power supply alarm:

Do you want to enable Power B alarm (y/n)

Do you want to disable Power B alarm (y/n)

5. Enter y to enable or disable the power supply B alarm.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface


Enabling and Disabling Fan AlarmsEnable the fan alarm to direct the system to generate an alarm in the event of a fan unit failure. Disable the fan alarm to direct the system not to generate an alarm in the event of a fan unit failure. We recommend that you enable the fan alarm.

To enable and disable fan alarms, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft main menu enter ala to open the Alarm Information menu.

2. From the Alarm Information menu, enter fan to open the Fan Tray Information menu. This menu displays the current status of fan units 1, 2, and 3 and the status of the fan alarm.

3. From the Fan Tray Information menu, enter ena to enable a disabled fan alarm or dis to disable an enabled fan alarm.

Viewing Current AlarmsTo view current alarms, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft interface main menu, enter ala to open the Alarm Information menu. This menu lists the number of critical, major, minor, and alarms on each UAP slot. To view more detailed information about the alarms on a particular slot, proceed to step 2.

2. Enter slo.


3. Enter the slot number for which you want to view current alarms to open the Slot# Alarm Information Menu.

This menu lists a table of the following information for each alarm currently present on the specified slot.

Port/Device — The port and device on which the alarm is present.

Severity — The severity of the alarm: Critical, Major, or Minor.

◆ A critical alarm indicates a problem that requires immediate attention, such as a CPU failure.

◆ A major alarm indicates a problem that affects system transmission service on 24 or more subscriber lines (such as a loss of signal on a T1 port, or a T1 card failure).

◆ A minor alarm indicates a non-service-affecting problem, such as a cooling fan failure.

Category — The category of the alarm; for example Transmission.

Problem — The problem causing the alarm; for example Loss of Signal or Loss of Frame.



Viewing History AlarmsTo view history alarms, follow these steps:

1. From the Craft interface main menu, enter ala to open the Alarm Information menu.

2. Enter his to open the Alarm History Information menu. This menu lists a summary of the history alarm counts (past events) for each UAP slot. To view more detailed information about the history alarms on a particular slot, proceed to step 3.

3. Enter slo.


4. Enter the slot number for which you want to view history alarms.

The Craft interface prompts you to specify whether you want to view the oldest or the most recent alarms first.

5. Enter the number corresponding to your choice to open the Slot# Alarm History Information Menu. This menu lists a table of the following information for each history alarm on the specified slot.

Date — The date that the alarm occurred.

Time — The time that the alarm occurred.

Port/Device — The port and device on which the alarm is present.


Severity — The severity of the alarm: Critical, Major, Minor, or Cleared.

Clearing History AlarmsTo clear history alarms, follow these steps:


2. Enter his to open the Alarm History Information menu.

3. From the Alarm History Information menu, enter cle.

The Craft interface prompts you to confirm that you want to clear the history alarms.

4. Enter y to clear the history alarms.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Alarms Using the Craft Interface


Configuring External AlarmsTo specify the problem type associated with the external alarms connected to the eight alarm inputs on the alarm output relay box, follow these steps:


2. From the Alarm Information menu, enter ext to open the External Alarm Information menu. This menu lists the following information for each of the eight external alarm inputs:

Inputs — The external alarm input number.

ID — The ID number of the external alarm (1-8).

Service — Indicates the status of the external alarm: Disabled or Enabled.

Problem Type — The environmental problem type assigned to this input.

Severity — The severity of the assigned alarm. External alarms are automatically assigned a severity of Major.

3. Specify the environmental problem type you want to assign to the alarm input.

a. Enter set.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter an alarm input number.

b. Enter the external alarm input number to which you want to assign the alarm (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to open the Input# External Alarm Setting menu. This alarm input number corresponds to the input number on the alarm output relay box on the rear of the UAP.

The Craft interface prompts you to select the problem type of the external alarm.

c. Enter the number corresponding to the problem type that you want to assign to the specified alarm input.

The Craft interface returns you to the External Alarm Information menu, where the problem type you selected is listed and assigned a severity level of Major.



4. Enable or disable the external alarm.

You must assign an environmental problem type to the external alarm input before you can enable or disable the external alarm.

a. From the External Alarm Information menu, enter ena to enable a disabled external alarm or dis to disable an enabled external alarm.


b. Enter the external alarm input number which you want to enable or disable (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to enable or disable the specified external alarm.

Changing External Alarm AssignmentsTo assign a different problem type to an external alarm input, follow these steps:


2. From the Alarm Information menu, enter ext to open the External Alarm Information menu.

3. From the External Alarm Information menu, enter una.


4. Enter the external alarm input number for which you want to change the problem type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to open the Input# External Alarm Setting menu. This alarm input number corresponds to the input number on the alarm output relay box on the rear of the UAP.

The Craft interface prompts you to select the problem type of the external alarm.

5. Enter the number corresponding to the new problem type that you want to assign to the specified alarm input.

The Craft interface returns you to the External Alarm Information menu, where the new problem type is listed and assigned a severity level of Major.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface


Cutting off the Audible AlarmTo cut off the audible alarm (ACO), follow these steps:


2. From the Alarm Information menu, enter aco.

The Craft interface prompts you to confirm that you want to cut off the audible alarm.

3. Enter y to cut off the alarm.

Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface

This section tells you how to view DS1 and DS3 performance statistics. DS1 statistics are available on a per-port basis, while DS3 statistics are available on a per-slot basis.

Viewing DS1 Performance StatisticsTo view DS1 performance statistics using the Craft interface, follow these steps:


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter per.


3. Enter the slot number for which you want to view DS1 performance statistics to open the Performance Monitor menu for that slot.

4. Enter por.


5. Enter the port number for which you want to view statistics to open the T1 Board Port # Performance Monitor menu.

This menu lists the types of DS1 statistics available for display

6. Enter the number corresponding to the type of error you want to view to open display a list of the selected error count, in 15-minute intervals over the last 24 hours.

Monitoring Performance Using the Craft Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Viewing DS3 Performance StatisticsTo view DS3 performance statistics using the Craft interface, follow these steps:




3. Enter the slot number for which you want to view DS3 performance statistics to open the DS3 Board Performance Monitor menu.

This menu lists the types of DS3 statistics available for display

4. Enter the number corresponding to the type of error you want to view to open display a list of the selected error count, in 15-minute intervals over the last 24 hours.

Resetting the Performance MonitorYou can reset DS1 and DS3 performance monitoring statistics on a slot-by-slot basis.

To reset a performance monitor, follow these steps:




3. Enter the slot number for which you want to reset the performance monitor.

4. Enter res to reset the performance statistics for the specified slot.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Setting Loopbacks


Setting Loopbacks To set loopbacks on a DS1 port, follow these steps:

In this release, loopbacks are available only on DS1 cards.


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter dia.


3. Enter the slot number of the card on which you want to set a loopback to open the T1 Loopback menu. This menu lists the loopbacks currently set on each port on the card.

4. Enter act to activate a loopback.


5. Enter the number of the port on which you want to set the loopback.

The Craft interface prompts you to select a loopback type: NO (no loopback), LLB (line loopback), or PLB (path loopback).

6. Enter the number corresponding to the type of loopback you want to set.

Deactivating LoopbacksTo deactivate a DS1 loopback, follow these steps:


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter dia.


3. Enter the slot number of the card on which you want to deactivate a loopback to open the T1 Loopback menu.

4. Enter dea to deactivate the loopback.

Viewing Maintenance Information 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Viewing Maintenance Information

From the Craft interface Maintenance menu, you can view the following types of information:

◆ TDM backplane allocation

◆ Voice channel call status

◆ System CRV status

The following subsections provide detailed instructions for viewing these types of information.

Viewing TDM Backplane AllocationTo view TDM backplane allocation, follow these steps:

TDM backplane information is available only for DS1 boards.


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter tdm.


3. Enter the desired slot number to view the TDM backplane allocation for the selected slot.

Viewing Voice Channel Call StatusTo view voice channel call status, follow these steps:

Voice channel status information is available only for DS1 boards.


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter cal.


3. Enter the desired slot number to open the Voice Channel Status menu for port #1 on the selected slot. This menu lists the CRV, status, type (IG or LS (line side)), mode (active or idle), ABCD bits and TS (timeslot) for each DS0 channel on the port.

4. (optional) To view the Voice Channel Status menu for another port on the same slot:

a. From the Voice Channel Status menu, enter por.


b. Enter the desired port number to view voice channel status information for the selected port.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Viewing Maintenance Information


5. (optional) To reset a DS0:

a. From the Voice Channel Status menu, enter res.


b. Enter the desired channel number to reset the selected DS0.

Viewing System CRV SystemTo view system CRV status (DS1 terminal ID and TDM number) for a specific CRV, follow these steps:

CRV status information is available only for DS1 boards.


2. From the Maintenance menu, enter crv.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter an interface number.

3. Enter the number of the IDLC group for which you want to view CRV status.

The Craft interface prompts you to enter a CRV number.

4. Enter the desired CRV to display the system status (DsTermId and TdmNum) for the selected IDLC group and CRV. Use the next and previous commands to view information for other CRVs in the same IG.


Using the TL1 Messaging Interface to Manage the

UAP

This chapter tells you how to use the TL1 messaging interface to manage the UAP. It contains the following sections:

◆ Logging on as TL1 Interface

◆ Managing User Accounts Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Configuring System Information Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Configuring Clocking Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Provisioning Data Transmission Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Managing Cross Connections Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Managing Alarms Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Managing Alarms Using the TL1 Interface

◆ Monitoring Performance Using the TL1 Interface

◆ TL1 Command Reference

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Logging on as TL1 Interface


Logging on as TL1 Interface

To log on to the UAP as TL1 interface, follow these steps:












tl1

Enter TL1 interface commands in all lowercase letters.

3. At the ; prompt, enter:

act-user::admin:1::password#1;

to initiate a user session using the default uid (admin) and pid (password#1).

To log out of the TL1 interface, enter exit.

Getting Help

Enter ? at the tl1> prompt to list the available commands based on your user access privilege.

For a description and syntax for a specific command, enter:

?<command>

where <command> is the command name.

TL1 Command Syntax

A TL1 command is a series of text fields separated by colons and terminated by a semicolon. The syntax is as follows:

Logging on as TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


verb:tid:aid:ctag:genblock:options;

The verb, colons and semicolons are required for every command. The other fields are required for some commands but not for others.

The following subsections describe the components of a TL1 command.

TL1 Verbs

TL1 verbs are abbreviated text strings of the action to be performed. In general these actions retrieve or modify a piece of data. For example the command to retrieve the date and time is rtrv-dat.

TL1 TIDs

The TID (target identifier) is optional for most TL1 commands. When you enter a command into the UAP, the TID is checked against the SID (the source identifier or UAP system name). If the TID matches the SID, the command is processed. If the TID does not match the SID, the command is denied.

A command with a blank TID will always be processed by the UAP.

TL1 AIDs

The AID (access identifier) specifies the entity on which to perform the command. The AID format differs depending on the entity being targeted. Table 19 lists the various AID types and the expected AID format.

In some cases, you can use an ampersand (&) to specify more than one target:

◆ To specify two targets, use a single ampersand to separate the AIDs. For example, to specify slot 1/port 3 and slot 1/port 7 as target entities, you would use the format 1-3&-7.

◆ To specify a range of targets, use double ampersands to separate the AIDs. For example to specify ports 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 of slot 1 as target entities, you would use the format 1-3&&-7.

In this release, you can enter a range of values only for the last information compound (the port only, not the slot, in the examples given above).

Table 19 AID Types and Formats

AID Type Format Description

eqpt slot Specifies a <slot> number in the range of 1 to 22 containing an equipment type. You cannot enter a range of eqpt addresses.

dtf idlc-dtf Specifies a digital transmission facility (DTF). <idlc> is in the range of 1 to 3. <dtf> is the DTF belonging to the IDLC and is in the range 1 to 28. You can enter a range of <dtf> numbers only for rtrv commands.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Logging on as TL1 Interface


TL1 CTAGs

The CTAG (correlation tag) is optional for most TL1 commands. This field is used to match a response to the command by returning the CTAG in the response header. If you leave the CTAG is left blank, a zero (0) is returned in the response header.

TL1 GENBLOCKs

The GENBLOCK (general block) is not used in the UAP. It is optional for commands that do not specify any OPTIONS. For commands with OPTIONS, the general block must be null.

TL1 OPTIONS

TL1 OPTIONS are command-specific parameters. For information about the OPTIONS specific to each command, see “TL1 Command Reference” later in this chapter.

idlc idlc Specifies the IDLC number, where <idlc> is in the range of 1 to 3. You cannot enter a range of IDLC addresses.

line slot-port-line Specifies the slot, port, and line of the DS0 facility. <slot> is in the range of 1 to 22. <port> is in the range of 1 to 12. <line> is in the range of 1 to 24. You can enter a range of values only for the <line> number.

slk idlc-link Specifies the EOC and TMC signaling link belonging to a IDLC. <idlc> specifies the IDLC number in the range 1 to 4 and <link> specifies the primary/secondary signaling link and is either 1 for primary or 2 for secondary. You can enter a range of values only for the <link> number and only for rtrv commands.

t1 slot-port Specifies the slot and port of the DS1 facility. <slot> is in the range of 1 to 22. <port> is in the range of 1 to 12. You can enter a range of values only for the <port> number.

Table 19 AID Types and Formats (Cont.)

AID Type Format Description

Logging on as TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Comments Command

Normally the TL1 interface expects all data entered to form a command that will be executed. However, you can use the comments command (two consecutive dashes) to direct the TL1 interface to treat the rest of a line as a no operation. Any text on the line following the comments command (--) is ignored to the carriage return by the parser. The comments command is useful for commenting script files.

For example:

-- Setup T1 Facility side on slot 14, ports 1 through 4ent-t1:SANJOSE01:4-1&&-14:1;-- Setup slot 14 port 1 all DS0ent-line:SANJOSE01:14-1-1&&-24:2;-- assign CRVs for slot 14, port 1, ds0 1 though 4ed-line:SANJOSE01:14-1-1:3::SIGNL=FXS_LS,CRV=1;ed-line:SANJOSE01:14-1-2:4::SIGNL=FXS_LS,CRV=2;ed-line:SANJOSE01:14-1-3:5::SIGNL=FXS_LS,CRV=3;ed-line:SANJOSE01:14-1-4:6::SIGNL=FXS_LS,CRV=4;-- End of script file

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing User Accounts Using the TL1 Interface


Managing User Accounts Using the TL1 Interface

Each time a user logs on to the TL1 interface, he or she must enter a username (also known as user identifier or UID) and password (also known as password identifier or PID). Every user is also assigned a user access privilege (UAP) to control which system functions may be performed:

◆ ADMINISTRATOR — Users in this group can execute all system commands.

◆ PROVISIONER — Users in this group can execute all system commands, but they cannot change passwords.

◆ TESTER — Users in this group can view, but not change, system information, view and reset the performance monitoring registers, configure and switch DS1 protection, view all alarm configurations, and set the ACO.

◆ MONITOR — Users in this group cannot perform any provisioning; they have read-only access to system information, provisioning data, and performance monitoring data.

The UAP is shipped with a default user account with a privilege level of administrator.

Displaying Active User Accounts

Use the rtrv-user-secu command to display the active user accounts in the system. The rtrv-user-secu command retrieves the users’ log in names and access levels, but not the passwords.

For example:

TL1> rtrv-user-secu:SANJOSE01::1;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 1 COMPLD "admin:,ADMINISTRATOR" "provision:,PROVISIONER" "tester:,TESTER" "monitor:,MONITOR";

The command entered in this example left the AID blank which directed the TL1 interface to retrieve all user accounts. The name to the left of the colon (‘:’) is the login name and the text to the right of the comma (‘,’) is the access level for that user.

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Adding a New User Account

Use the ent-user-secu command to add a new user account. For example to add the user bob with the password apple#2 and privilege level of provisioner, execute the following command:

TL1> ent-user-secu:SANJOSE01:bob:1::apple#2,,PROVISIONER;

The TL1 interface returns the following response:

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 1 COMPLD;

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface

Before you can configure system information and provision facilities and IDLCs, you must set up an inventory of the cards installed in the shelf. When you set up an inventory, you confirm the physical configuration of your UAP by assigning cards logically to the slots in the shelf.

To set up an inventory using the TL1 interface, follow these steps:

1. Assign a T1 board to a slot

a. Use the ent-t1 command as follows:

tl1> ent-eqpt:SANJOSE01:1:3::DSX1;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 3 COMPLD;

b. Use the rtrv-eqpt command to verify that a T1 board is assigned to the desired slot:

tl1> rtrv-eqpt:SANJOSE01:1:4;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 4 COMPLD"1::DSX1,DSX1,,A0,SBLSWZOBAA,100101FL9922,0.5.3";

2. Create the (multiple) T1s that connect to the switch side. You must create T1 ports before you can do any provisioning.

Note that the range feature was used when specifying the AID so that all twelve T1 ports were retrieved with one command. The retrieved data shows that all ports are unassigned and out of service (OOS).

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface


a. Display the current T1 port provisioning using the rtrv-t1 command:

tl1> rtrv-t1:SANJOSE01:1-1&&-12:6;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 6 COMPLD"1-1:::,,,:OOS""1-2:::,,,:OOS""1-3:::,,,:OOS""1-4:::,,,:OOS""1-5:::,,,:OOS""1-6:::,,,:OOS""1-7:::,,,:OOS""1-8:::,,,:OOS""1-9:::,,,:OOS""1-10:::,,,:OOS""1-11:::,,,:OOS""1-12:::,,,:OOS";

b. Assign a T1 port using the ent-t1 command:

tl1> ent-t1:SANJOSE01:1-1:7;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 7 COMPLD;

c. Retrieve the data for port 1 to verify that the port is assigned (but still out of service) and to view the default provisioned data for the port.

tl1> rtrv-t1:SANJOSE01:1-1:8;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 8 COMPLD"1-1:::FMT=ESF,LINECDE=B8ZS,LB0=0_133,PRM=NO,PM=NO,LPBK=YES:OOS";

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Displaying an Equipment List

Use the rtrv-eqpt command to query the shelf for the installed boards. For example, to view a list of all the cards installed in the shelf, execute the following command:

TL1> rtrv-eqpt:SANJOSE01:1&&22:2;


SANJOSE01 99-04-08 02:14:22

M 2 COMPLD

"1::DSX1,,,A0,SBLSWZOBAA,100101FL9922,0.5.3"


"3::,,,,,,"

"4::,,,,,,"


"6::,,,,,,"



"9::,,,,,,"

"10::,,,,,,"

"11::CPU,CPU,,A0,SBLSWZOBAA,100111FL9922,0.1.1"

"12::,CPU,,,,,"

"13::,,,,,,"


"15::,,,,,,"

"16::,,,,,,"

"17::,,,,,,"

"18::,,,,,,"




"22::,,,,,,"

;

In this example slots 1,2,5,7,8,14,19,20, and 21 have DSX1 boards installed in the shelf but are currently unassigned. Slot 11 has a CPU board installed and assigned. Slot 12 is assigned a CPU board but no board is physically present.

The rest of the information shown displays revision number, CLEI number, serial number, vendor code, date of manufacture and software version. Refer to the description of the rtrv-eqpt command under “Resource Management Commands” later in this chapter for the exact display format.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring System Information Using the TL1 Interface


Configuring System Information Using the TL1 Interface

Once you have set up an inventory of the boards in the shelf, you can configure the following system information:

◆ Equipment name

◆ Date and time

◆ IP address (at bootup only for host software release 0.6.0)

◆ Inactivity timer

◆ User accounts

The following subsections provide further details about how to configure these types of system information using the TL1 interface.

Assigning a Name to the UAP

Use the set-sid (set source identifier) TL1 command to change the source identifier (also known as the system name). The default source identifier is Node1.

For example, to change the default system name to SANJOSE01, execute the following command:

tl1> set-sid:::::SANJOSE01;


SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 0 COMPLD;

From now on, all commands that specify a target identifier (TID) must use the new name SANJOSE01 or else the command will be denied.

Setting the Date and Time

Use the ed-dat (edit date) TL1 command to set the system date and time. For example, to set the date and time to June 3rd, 1999, 11:45 am, enter the following:

ed-dat:::::99-6-3,11-45-00;

The TL1 interface returns the date and time in the response header.

NODE1 99-06-03 11:45:00M 0 COMPLD;

Assigning the Shelf IP AddressFor this host software release, you must make all changes to Ethernet properties at bootup. For details about how to change the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway at bootup, see “Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity” in Chapter 2.

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using the TL1 Interface

An IDLC (Integrated Digital Loop Carrier) is a DLC (Digital Loop Carrier) system that has a direct digital interface to the LDS (Local Digital Switch). IDLCs are the digital transmission groups you can use within the switch. For this host software release, you can configure one IDLC for each switch.

Use the ent-idlc TL1 command to create an IDLC and the ed-idlc-t1 command to edit the attributes associated with an IDLC DS1 level facility. For further information, see the detailed descriptions of these commands under “Service Management Commands” later in this chapter.

Configuring Clocking Using the TL1 Interface



◆ Specifying the timing mode: an ordered list that indicates the priority of the clock sources. For example, a timing mode of REFA, REFB, NET, INT indicates that the UAP will begin by using the clock source designated as reference clock A as its timing source. If reference clock A fails, the UAP will switch over to reference clock B. If reference clock B fails, the UAP will switch over to the network clock, and if the network clock fails, the UAP will switch over to the internal clock.

Use the set-synch TL1 command to set the clock (configure synchronization attributes) for the UAP. For further information, see the detailed description of this command under “System Administration Commands” later in this chapter.

Provisioning Data Transmission Using the TL1 Interface

To provision DS1 facilities, you must provision both the DS1 ports and the DS0 channels, as described in this section.

IMPORTANT: Each time you complete the provisioning on a slot, enter the save-db command to save the provisioned data in the persistent database. For this host software release, only traffic transmission data is considered as provisioned data. In future releases, the clock and header information will also be included in the provisioned data.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Provisioning Data Transmission Using the TL1 Interface


To provision DS1 facilities using the TL1 interface, follow these steps:

You must assign a board to the slot, as described earlier under “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using the TL1 Interface,” before you can provision that slot. If you enter a slot number for which you have not assigned a board, you will get an unknown board type error. If this happens, use the ent-t1 command to assign a board to the slot, then proceed to provision the DS1 facilities.

1. Provision the UAP T1 line characteristics to match that of the switch

a. Use the ed-t1 command to make a change to the any of the T1 provisioned data. For example, to change the line coding from B8ZS to AMI, enter the following command:

tl1> ed-t1:SANJOSE01:1-1:9::LINECDE=AMI;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 9 COMPLD;

b. Retrieve the data for the port to verify that the line coding has now been changed to AMI:

tl1> rtrv-t1::1-1:10;

SANJOSE01 99-06-03 11:45:00M 10 COMPLD"1-1:::FMT=ESF,LINECDE=AMI,LB0=0_133,PRM=NO,PM=NO,LPBK=YES:OOS";

2. Create the T1s that connect to the subscriber side. Just as you did with the T1 ports, you must create and provision each DS0 that is to be used for call processing.

a. Create the DS0 using the ent-line command:

tl1> ent-line:SANJOSE01:1-1-5:11;SANJOSE01 99-04-08 02:14:22M 11 COMPLD;

The AID for the ent-line command is in the format of slot-port-line, so this command is creating a DS0 on slot 1, port 1, ds0 number 5.

b. View the current provisioned data using the rtrv-line command:

tl1> rtrv-line:SANJOSE01:1-1-1&&-5:12;

SANJOSE01 99-04-08 02:14:22M 12 COMPLD"1-1-1::::OOS""1-1-2::::OOS""1-1-3::::OOS""1-1-4::::OOS""1-1-5:::SIGNL=FXS_LS,RBS=ABCD,CRV=0:IS";

The rtrv-line output shows that lines 1 through 4 are currently unassigned (not created) and that line 5 is now assigned and in service.

Managing Cross Connections Using the TL1 Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


3. Provision the UAP T1 line characteristics to match that of the subscriber equipment. Use the procedure described in step 3

4. Create the DS0s on the subscriber side and assign a CRV and signaling type.

a. Modify the DS0 parameters using the ed-line command. For example, to change the CRV number of slot 1, port 1 line 5 enter the following command:

tl1> ed-line:SANJOSE01:1-1-5:13::CRV=21;

SANJOSE01 99-04-08 02:14:22M 13 COMPLD;

b. Retrieve the DS0 data to verify the change:

tl1> rtrv-line:SANJOSE01:1-1-5:14;

SANJOSE01 99-04-08 02:14:22M 14 COMPLD"1-1-5:::SIGNL=FXS_LS,RBS=ABCD,CRV=21:IS";

Managing Cross Connections Using the TL1 Interface

You can cross-connect a DS1 or group of DS0s from any DS1 on the UAP to any other DS1 or group of DS0s—as long as the payload on both sides matches. The following subsections describe how to provision DS0 and DS1 cross connections.

Use the ent-crs-t1 TL1 command to enter a DS1 level cross connection. This ent-crs-t1 command creates a full DS1 cross connection between the specified access identifiers. For further information, see the detailed description of this command under “Service Management Commands” later in this chapter.

Managing Alarms Using the TL1 Interface

Using the TL1 interface, you can retrieve alarms from the UAP, enable and inhibit reporting of alarms, and cut off the audible alarm (ACO). For further information, see “Alarm Management Commands” later in this chapter.

Monitoring Performance Using the TL1 Interface

Using the TL1 interface, you can initialize the performance registers. For further information, see “Performance Monitoring Commands” later in this chapters.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 TL1 Command Reference


TL1 Command Reference

You can use the TL1 interface to perform configuration and management operations in the following functional categories, which you access via the TL1 commands listed below.

◆ Resource Management — Inventory and configuration of hardware and software network resources. For complete command syntax and sample input see “Resource Management Commands” later in this chapter.

dlt-eqptent-eqptrtrv-eqptrtrv-hdr

◆ System Administration — Management of users, security, and access rights. For complete command syntax and sample input see “System Administration Commands” later in this chapter.

act-user

canc-user

dlt-user-secu

ed-dat

ed-pid

ed-user-secu

ent-user-secu

rtrv-dat

rtrv-synch

rtrv-user-secu

save-db

set-sid

set-synch

◆ Service Management — Assignment and change of network resources to customer services. For complete command syntax and sample input see “Service Management Commands” later in this chapter.

dlt-crs-t1dlt-idlcdlt-idlc-t1dlt-t1dlt-lineed-idlc-t1ed-lineed-t1ent-crs-t1ent-idlcent-lineent-t1rtrv-crs-t1rtrv-idlc-t1rtrv-linertrv-t1

TL1 Command Reference 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


◆ Alarm Management — Reporting and logging of alarms. For complete command syntax and sample input see “Alarm Management Commands” later in this chapter.

alw-msg-allinh-msg-allopr-aco-allrtrv-alm-allrtrv-alm-t1

◆ Performance Monitoring — Assessment of link quality. For complete command syntax and sample input see “Performance Monitoring Commands” later in this chapter.

init-reg-t1

The following subsections provide detailed descriptions of all TL1 commands, organized alphabetically by management category.

Resource Management Commands

Use the following TL1 commands to access the resource management functions:

dlt-eqpt

Deletes an application card from internal memory. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

dlt-eqpt:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters

◆ tid — target identifier

◆ aid — access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is eqpt.

◆ ctag — correlation tag

Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-eqpt command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters

See the description of the rtrv-hdr command for normal response output parameters.



Example Input/Output

dlt-eqpt:UAP-3:1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

ent-eqpt

Enters attributes of an application card. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

ENT-EQPT:[tid]:aid:ctag::clei;

Input Parameters

◆ tid — Target identifier

◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is eqpt.

◆ ctag — Correlation tag

◆ clei — CLEI code of the board. This identifies the board type. Valid types are:

◆ DSX1 (12 port T1 board)

◆ SBLSWZOBAA (12 port T1 board)

Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-eqpt command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-eqpt:UAP-3:1:1234::SBLSWZOBAA;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD



;

rtrv-eqpt

Retrieves attributes of an application card. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-eqpt:[tid]:[aid]:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is eqpt. If you do not specify an AID, then all slots are retrieved.


Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-eqpt command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"aid::phytype,astype,app,ssn,clei,sln,vrsn"

;

Output Parameters

◆ sid — Source identifier


◆ aid — Access Identifier

◆ phytype — A character string that identifies the physical card. For example, DSX1 for a T1 board. If no board is physically present then this field will be empty.

◆ astype — A character string that identifies the assigned card. For example, DSX1 for a T1 board. If no board is assigned then this field will be empty.

◆ app —þApparatus code

◆ ssn — Series number

◆ clei — CLEI code of the board. This identifies the board type.

◆ sln — Serial number. The format is six digits of serial number followed by two characters of board vendor code followed by four digits of manufacture date code. The date code is in the format of two digits representing the year and two digits representing the week of the year. For example, the 22nd week of 1999 would be represented as 9922.

◆ vrsn — Version number of the executing software




rtrv-eqpt:UAP-3:1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

"1:DSX1,DSX1,,A0,1234500002,100121FL9922,0.1.1"

;

rtrv-hdr

Retrieves the header. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-hdr:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters



Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-hdr command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters


◆ date — Date in the format YY-MM-DD where YY is year, MM is month and DD is day

◆ time — Time in the format HH-MM-SS where HH is hours, MM is minutes and SS is seconds.

◆ ctag —þCorrelation tag


rtrv-hdr:SANJOSE01::1234;

SANJOSE01 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



System Administration Commands

Use the following TL1 commands to access the Management System software system administration function.

act-user

Activates a user session. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

act-user:[tid]:uid:ctag::pid;

Input Parameters


◆ uid — User identifier. The login username. The UID can be no more than 12 characters and is case sensitive.


◆ pid — The user password identifier (6 to 12 characters). This field is case sensitive

Output Format

After receiving a valid act-user command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



act-user:UAP-3:admin:1234::password#1;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;



canc-user

Cancels a user session. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

canc-user:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters



Output Format

After receiving a valid canc-user command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



canc-user:UAP-3::1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;

dlt-user-secu

Deletes a user account. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

dlt-user-secu:[tid]:uid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters






Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-user-secu command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



dlt-user-secu:UAP-3:bob:1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;

ed-dat

Edits the system date and time. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

ed-dat:[tid]::ctag::[date][,time];

Input Parameters



◆ date — Date in the format YY-MM-DD where YY is year, MM is month and DD is day

◆ time — Time in the format HH-MM-SS where HH is hours, MM is minutes and SS is seconds.

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-dat command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters





ed-dat:UAP-3::1234::99-3-29,17-45-00;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

ed-pid

Edits a user’s password. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

ed-pid:[tid]:uid:ctag::oldpid,newpid;

Input Parameters




◆ oldpid — The existing password identifier. This field is case sensitive.

◆ newpi — The new user password identifier(6 to 12 characters). This field is case sensitive

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-pid command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ed-pid:UAP-3:bob:1234::andanets,jupiter;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ed-user-secu

Edits a user’s account parameters. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

ed-user-secu:[tid]:uid:ctag::[newuid],[newpid],,[uap];

Input Parameters




◆ newuid — The new user identification. If you do not enter a newuid, the uid is not changed.

◆ newpid — The new user password identifier (6 to 12 characters). This field is case sensitive. If you do not enter a newpid, the password is not changed.

◆ uap — User access privilege. Values include

◆ administrator — Administration level. Access to all commands.

◆ provisioner — Provisioner level. May only execute certain provisioning, maintenance and read-only commands

◆ tester — Tester level. May only execute certain maintenance and read only commands.

◆ monitor — Monitor level. May only execute certain read only commands.

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-user-secu command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ed-user-secu:UAP-3:bob:1234::,,,PROVISIONER;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ent-user-secu

Enters a new user’s account parameters. The privilege level for this command is administrator. This command creates a new user account. To modify an existing account, see ed-user-secu.

Input Format

eny-user-secu:[tid]:uid:ctag::pid,,[uap];

Input Parameters




◆ pid — The new user password identifier (6 to 12 characters). This field is case sensitive. If you do not enter a newpid, the default password is not changed.

◆ uap — User access privilege. Values include

◆ administrator — Administration level. Access to all commands.

◆ provisioner — Provisioner level. May only execute certain provisioning, maintenance and read-only commands

◆ tester — Tester level. May only execute certain maintenance and read only commands.

◆ monitor — Monitor level. May only execute certain read only commands.

If you do not enter a <uap> value, the uap defaults to monitor.

Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-user-secu command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-user-secu:UAP-3:bob:1234::bravo8,,PROV;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD



;

rtrv-dat

Retrieves the system date and time. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-dat:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters



Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-dat command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

":DATETIME"

;

Output Parameters

◆ datetime —þThe date and time in yy-mm-dd,hh-mm-ss format, where yy=year, mm=month, dd=day, hh = hour, mm=minutes,and ss =seconds.


rtrv-dat:UAP-3::1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

":99-3-29,17-46-32"

;

rtrv-synch

Retrieves the provisioning and operational information on the synchronization attributes set by the set-synch command. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-synch:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters





Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-synch command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"::SYNCMOD=x,REFA=x,REFB=x,NET_STS=x,REFA_STS=x,REFB_STS=x"

;

Output Parameters

◆ syncmod — Provisioned synchronization mode. One of: auto1, auto2, auto3, or auto4. The mode indicates the clock priority scheme for the four possible reference clocks as follows:

◆ auto1 = REFA, REFB, NET, INT

◆ auto2 = REFA, REFB, INT, NET

◆ auto3 = NET, REFA, REFB, INT

◆ auto4 = NET, INT, REFA, REFB

In the case of auto1, REFA has highest priority. If the REFA clock is valid then it will be used to derive the system master clock. If REFA is not valid, then REFB will automatically be used if valid. The hardware will automatically use the highest priority valid reference source.

◆ refA — Provisioned reference A clock signal source in the format SS-PP, where SS = slot number from 1 to 22 and PP is the port number for the selected slot. If the reference is not set, then NA will be returned.

◆ refB — Provisioned reference B clock signal source in the format SS-PP, where SS = slot number from 1 to 22 and PP is the port number for the selected slot. If the reference is not set, then NA will be returned.

◆ net_sts —þNetwork reference clock status: good (indicating a valid clock) or bad (indicating a missing clock from the backplane network clock connector).

◆ refa_sts —þReference A clock status: good (indicating a valid clock) or bad (indicating a missing clock from the reference A clock source).

◆ refb_sts —þReference B clock status: good (indicating a valid clock) or bad (indicating a missing clock from the reference B clock source).




rtrv-synch:UAP-3::1234;

SANJOSE01 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

"::SYNCMOD=AUTO1,REFA=1-1,REFB=NA,NET_STS=BAD,REFA_STS=GOOD,REFB_STS=BAD"

;

rtrv-user-secu

Retrieves the user security information. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

rtrv-user-secu:[tid]:uid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-user-secu command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"uid:,uap"

;

Output Parameters



rtrv-user-secu:UAP-3:bob:1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

"bob:,PROV"

;



sav-db

Saves the provisioned data to the internal database. The privilege level for this command is administrator. As data is modified on the UAP, it is stored only in RAM. If the card is restarted, the data is lost. This command stores all data to the flash memory so it can be recovered in the event of power cycle.

Input Format

sav-db:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid sav-db command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



sav-db:SANJOSE01::1234;

SANJOSE01 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

set-sid

Edits the source identifier. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

set-sid:[tid]::ctag::sid;

Input Parameters




Output Format



After receiving a valid set-sid command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



set-sid:UAP-3::1234::SANJOSE01;

SANJOSE01 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

set-synch

Sets the synchronization attributes. The privilege level for this command is administrator.

Input Format

set-synch:[tid]::ctag::specblock;

Input Parameters



◆ specblock — Specification block containing one or more of the following parameters:

◆ syncmod — Synchronization mode. One of: auto1, auto2, auto3, or auto4. The mode selects the clock priority scheme for the four possible reference clocks as follows:

◆ auto1 = REFA, REFB, NET, INT

◆ auto2 = REFA, REFB, INT, NET

◆ auto3 = NET, REFA, REFB, INT

◆ auto4 = NET, INT, REFA, REFB

In the case of auto1, REFA has highest priority. If the REFA clock is valid then it will be used to derive the system master clock. If REFA is not valid, then REFB will automatically be used if valid. The hardware will automatically use the highest priority valid reference source.

◆ refA — Reference bus A. This sets the reference A bus to contain the reference signal from a selected source. Valid format is REFA=SS-PP



where SS = slot number from 1 to 22 and PP is the port number for the selected slot.

◆ refb — Reference bus B. This sets the reference B bus to contain the reference signal from a selected source. Valid format is REFB=SS-PP where SS = slot number from 1 to 22 and PP is the port number for the selected slot.

Output Format

After receiving a valid set-synch command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



set-synch:UAP-3::1234::SYNCMOD=AUTO2,REFA=1-1;

SANJOSE01 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



Service Management Commands

Use the following TL1 commands to provision services:

dlt-crs-t1

Deletes a DS1 level cross connection. The privilege level for this command is provisioner. This command will delete a DS1 cross connection that exists between the specified access identifiers. If the cross connection does not exist, then a DENY will be returned.

Input Format

dlt-crs-t1:[tid]:src_aid,dst_aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ src_aid — Source access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is T1.

◆ dst_aid — Destination access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is T1.


Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-crs-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



dlt-crs-t1:UAP-3:1-1,2-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



dlt-idlc

Deletes an IDLC. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

dlt-idlc:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is idlc.


Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-idlc command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



dlt-idlc:UAP-3:1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

dlt-idlc-t1

Deletes a DS1 level facility from a IDLC. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

dlt-idlc-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is dtf.




Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-idlc-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



dlt-idlc-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

dlt-t1

Deletes a DS1 level interface. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

dlt-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is t1.


Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters





dlt-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

dlt-line

Deletes a DS0 line interface. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

dlt-line:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is line.


Output Format

After receiving a valid dlt-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



dlt-line:UAP-3:1-1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ed-idlc-t1

Edits the attributes associated with an IDLC DS1 level facility. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

ed-idlc-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag::[dtf_address][:pst];

Input Parameters




◆ dtf_address — The address of a physical DS1 level facility residing within the shelf. The format is SS-PP, where SS is the slot number and PP is the port number.

◆ pst — Primary service state: is (in service) or oos (out of service).

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-idlc-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ed-idlc-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234::1-1:IS;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ed-line

Edits the attributes of a DS0 level interface. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

ed-line:[tid]:aid:ctag::[spec_block][:pst];

Input Parameters




◆ spec_block — Specific block. This parameter block is used to specify the provisionable attributes for this facility and take the form of: PARAMETER=value. Parameters are position independent. When you enter multiple parameters, you must separate them with commas.

◆ signl — Signaling mode

◆ fxs_ls — FXS loop start

◆ fxs_gs — FXS ground start

◆ fxo_ls — FXO loop start

◆ fx0_ls — FXO loop start

◆ ig — Interface group facing switch

◆ rbs — Robbed bits

◆ a — Only use the A bits

◆ ab — Use both A and B bits

◆ abcd — Use all ABCD bits

◆ trans — Transparent

◆ CRV — Call reference value; an integer value in the range 1-2048.

◆ pst — Primary service state

◆ is —þIn service

◆ oos — Out of service

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-line command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;



Output Parameters



ed-line:UAP-3:1-1-1:1234::SIGNL=FXS_LS,CRV=368:IS;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;

ed-t1

Edits the attributes of a DS1 level facility. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

ed-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag::[spec_block][:pst];

Input Parameters





◆ fmt — Frame format

◆ ESF – Extended Superframe mode

◆ SF – Superframe (D4) mode

◆ lbo — Line build out. Specified in number of feet.

◆ 0_133 — 0 to 133 feet

◆ 133_266 —þ133 feet to 266 feet

◆ 266_399 — 66 feet to 399 feet

◆ 399_533 — 399 feet to 533 feet

◆ 533_655 —þ533 feet to 655 feet



◆ linecde — Line coding

◆ ami — Alternate Mark Insertion

◆ b8zs — Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution

◆ amizcs — AMI with bit stuffing

◆ prm — Performance report message

◆ yes — Generate performance report messages on this interface

◆ no — Do not generate performance report messages on this interface

◆ pst — Primary provisioned service state

◆ is — In service

◆ oos —þOut of service

Output Format

After receiving a valid ed-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ed-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234::FMT=ESF,PRM=NO:IS;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ent-crs-t1

Enters a DS1 level cross connection. The privilege level for this command is provisioner. This command will create a full DS1 cross connection between the specified access identifiers. If the cross connection already exists with either access identifier, then a DENY will be returned.

Input Format

ent-crs-t1:[tid]:src_aid,dst_aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ src_aid — Source access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is T1.

◆ dst_aid — Destination access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is T1.


Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-crs-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-crs-t1:UAP-3:1-1,2-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ent-line

Enters (creates) a DS0 level interface. The privilege level for this command is provisioner. This command creates a DS0 level facility object. The object will contain default data that you can provision subsequently using the ed-line command.

Input Format

ent-line:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-line command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-line:UAP-3:1-1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ent-t1

Enters (creates) a DS1 level interface. The privilege level for this command is provisioner. This command will create a DS1 level facility object. The object will contain default data that you can provision subsequently using the ed-t1 command.

Input Format

ent-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



ent-idlc

Enters (creates) an IDLC. The privilege level for this command is provisioner. This creates an IDLC with default provisioning data.

Input Format

ent-idlc:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters


◆ aid — Access identifier. Refer to Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is idlc.


Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-idlc command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



ent-idlc:UAP-3:1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



rtrv-crs-t1

Retrieves DS1 level cross connection information between the specified access identifiers. The privilege level for this command is provisioner.

Input Format

rtrv-crs-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-crs-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



rtrv-crs-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

;



rtrv-idlc-t1

Retrieves attributes associated with an IDLC DS1 level facility. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-idlc-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-idlc-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"aid:::dtf_address:pst"

;

Output Parameters

◆ aid — Access identifier. The aid is in the format of IDLC-<num>-<t1> where <num> identifies the IDLC and is in the range 1 to 4 and <t1> identifies the digital transmission facility and is in the range from 1 to 28.

◆ dtf_addres — The address of a physical DS1 level facility residing within the shelf. The format is SS-PP where SS is the slot number and PP is the port number.

◆ pst — Primary service state. The DS1 level facility can be provisioned to one of the following:


◆ oos — Out of service


rtrv-idlc-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

"IDLC-1-1:::1-1:PST=IS"

M 1234 COMPLD

;



rtrv-line

Retrieves provisioning attributes for a DS0 level interface. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-line:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-line command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"aid:::SIGNL=x,RBS=x,CRV=x:pst"

;

Output Parameters

◆ signl — Signaling mode

◆ fxs_ls — GR303 FXS loop start

◆ fxs_gs — GR303 FXS ground start

◆ d4_fxs_ls — D4 FXS loop start

◆ d4_fxs_gs — D4 FXS ground start

◆ trans — Transparent

◆ rbs — Robbed bits

◆ a — Only use the A bits

◆ ab — Use both A and B bits

◆ abcd — Use all ABCD bits

◆ CRV — Call reference value; an integer value in the range 1-2048.




rtrv-line:UAP-3:1-1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

"1-1-1:::SIGNL=FXS_LS,RBS=ABCD,CRV=24:PST=IS"

;

rtrv-t1

Retrieves provisioned attributes of a DS1 level interface. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag::[spec_block][:state_block];

Input Parameters






◆ fmt — Frame format

◆ ESF – Extended Superframe mode

◆ SF – Superframe mode

◆ lbo — Line build out. Specified in number of feet.

◆ 0_133 — 0 to 133 feet

◆ 133_266 —þ133 feet to 266 feet

◆ 266_399 — 66 feet to 399 feet

◆ 399_533 — 399 feet to 533 feet

◆ 533_655 —þ533 feet to 655 feet

◆ linecde — Line coding

◆ ami — Alternate Mark Insertion

◆ b8zs — Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution

◆ amizcs — AMI with bit stuffing



◆ prm — Performance report message

◆ yes — Generate PRMs on this interface

◆ no — Do not generate PRMs on this interface

◆ pst — Primary provisioned service state


◆ oos —þOut of service

Output Format

After receiving a valid ent-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"aid:::fmt,linecde,lbo,prm:pst"

;

Output Parameters

aid — Access identifier. This is the slot and port for which the provisioned values are requested.

fmt —þFrame format

linecde —Line coding

lbo — Line build out

prm — Performance Report message transmission

pst — Primary service state


rtrv-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

IP 1234

<

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:45:01

M 1234 COMPLD

"1-1:::FMT=ESF,LINECDE=B8ZS,LBO=-7.5,PRM=YES:PST=IS"

;



Alarm Management Commands

Use the following TL1 commands to access the alarm management function:

alw-msg-all

This command resumes the reporting of alarm messages on the terminal. For telnet sessions, the messages are only reported when a user is logged on. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

alw-msg-all:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid alw-msg-all command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



alw-msg-all:UAP-3:1:1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;



inh-msg-all

This command inhibits the reporting of alarm messages on the terminal. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

inh-msg-all:[tid]:aid:ctag[::];

Input Parameters




Output Format

After receiving a valid alw-msg-all command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



inh-msg-all:UAP-3:1:1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;

opr-aco-all

This command operates the alarm cutoff. It cuts of the office audible alarm indication without changing the local alarm indications. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

opr-aco-all:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters





Output Format

After receiving a valid opr-aco-all command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



opr-aco-all:UAP-3::1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;

rtrv-alm-all

This command retrieves all alarms in the system. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-alm-all:[tid]::ctag[::];

Input Parameters



Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-alm-all command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"[aid],aidtype:ntfcncde,condtype,,ocrdat,ocrtm"

;



Output Parameters

◆ aid — Access identifier

◆ aidtype — Access identifier type. One of:

◆ t1 – A condition occurred at the DS1 level.

◆ eqpt – A condition occurred at the equipment level

◆ ntfcncde — Notification code. This indicates the alarm level for which the current alarms are requested. Values include:

◆ cr – Critical alarm

◆ mj – Major alarm

◆ mn – Minor alarm

◆ condtype — Condition type. See for a list of condition types.

◆ ocrdat — Occurrence date in the format MM-DD (month-day)

◆ ocrtm — Occurrence time in the format HH-MM-SS (hour-minutes-seconds)


rtrv-alm-all:UAP-3::1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

"1-1,T1:MJ,LOF,,03-31,02:13:43"

"1-1,T1:MJ,LOS,,03-31,02:13:43"

;

rtrv-alm-t1

This command retrieves all DS1 alarms in the system. The privilege level for this command is all.

Input Format

rtrv-alm-t1:[tid]:[aid]:ctag[::];

Input Parameters






Output Format

After receiving a valid rtrv-alm-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

"[aid],aidtype:ntfcncde,condtype,,ocrdat,ocrtm"

;

Output Parameters


◆ aidtype — Access identifier type. One of:

◆ t1 – A condition occurred at the DS1 level.

◆ eqpt – A condition occurred at the equipment level

◆ ntfcncde — Notification code. This indicates the alarm level for which the current alarms are requested. Values include:

◆ cr – Critical alarm

◆ mj – Major alarm

◆ mn – Minor alarm

◆ condtype — Condition type. See for tables of condition types.

◆ ocrdat — Occurrence date in the format MM-DD (month-day)

◆ ocrtm — Occurrence time in the format HH-MM-SS (hour-minutes-seconds)


rtrv-alm-T1:UAP-3:1-1:1234;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

"1-1,T1:MJ,LOF,,03-31,02:13:43"

"1-1,T1:MJ,LOS,,03-31,02:13:43"

;



Alarm Condition TypesThe following tables list the alarm condition types returned in alarm messages by the TL1 interface.

Table 20 lists condition types for trouble conditions.

Table 21 lists condition types for error conditions.

Table 20 <condtype> Trouble Conditions

<condtype> Description (Trouble Condition)

EOC EOC failure

CGA Carrier group alarm

AIS Alarm indication signal

B8ZSV B8Zs violations

BPV Bipolar violations

CRC-6 CRC errors

EXZ Excessive zeroes

FE Frame error

LOF Loss of frame

LOS Loss of signal

OOF Out of frame

RAI Remote alarm indication

SEF Severely errored frame

SYNC Loss of timing on synchronization

SYNCOOS Loss of timing on both the primary and secondary channels

SYNCPRI Loss of timing on the primary channel

SYNCSEC Loss of timing on the secondary channel

TMC Time-slot management channel failure

PWR Power failure

Table 21 <condtype> Error Conditions

<condtype> Description (Irregularity or Error Condition)

T-x Threshold violation for <montype>. For descriptions of <montype> conditions, see Table 23.



Table 22 lists condition types for off-normal conditions.

Table 22 <condtype> Off-Normal Conditions

<condtype> Description (Off-Normal Condition)

ACOIMED Alarm cutoff is in immediate mode

ACODELD Alarm cutoff is in delayed mode

ACOMAN Alarm cutoff is in manual mode

ACTLPBK Loopback is in active position

AMA-24 Call in progress greater than 24 hours

EXTCONT External control activated

FR-LPON-x Lamp x activated at equipment frame

FR-LPOFF-x Lamp x deactivated at equipment frame

LOGBUFR90 Log buffer 90% full

LOGBUFROVFL Log buffer overflow

LPBKLINE Loopback, line

LPBKPAYLOAD Loopback, payload

IP-V-M1-M2 Command with structure verb-mod1-mod2 is in progress

NORMAL Normal condition

MANSWTOINT Manual sync switch to internal

MANSWTOPRI Manual sync switch to primary reference

MANSWTOSEC Manual sync switch to secondary reference

SWFTDWN Software download in progress

SWTOINT Sync switch to internal clock

SWTOPRI Sync switch to primary reference

SWTOSEC Sync switch to secondary reference



Table 23 lists <montype> conditions.

Table 23 <montype> Conditions

<montype> <monval> Descripton

AISS decimal Alarm indication signal seconds

BPV decimal Bipolar violation count

B8ZSS decimal B8Zs seconds count

CSS-P decimal Control slip seconds count

CSS-PFE decimal Control slip seconds count, path far end

CVL decimal Coding violation count, line

ES-L decimal Errored seconds line count

ES-LFE decimal Errored seconds line count, far end

ES-P decimal Errored seconds, path

ES-PFE decimal Errored seconds, path far end

LOFS decimal Loss of frame seconds

LOSS-L decimal Loss of signal seconds, line

OOF decimal Out of frame second count

SAS-P decimal SEF-AIS second count

SEFS-PFE decimal Severely errored framing seconds, path far end

SESL decimal Severely errored seconds, line

SESP decimal Severely errored seconds, path

SES-PFE decimal Severely errored seconds, path far end

UASP decimal Unavailable seconds, path

UAS-PFE decimal Unavailable seconds, path far end



Performance Monitoring Commands

Use the following TL1 commands to access the Management System software performance monitoring function:

init-reg-t1

This command initializes DS1 level facility performance monitoring registers to zero. The privilege level for this command is administration.

Input Format

init-reg-t1:[tid]:aid:ctag::;

Input Parameters


◆ aid —þAccess identifier. See Table 19 for range and format. The <aidtype> is t1.


Output Format

After receiving a valid init-reg-t1 command, the TL1 interface returns the following output message:

sid date time

M ctag COMPLD

;

Output Parameters



init-reg-t1:UAP-3:1-1:1234::;

UAP-3 99-3-29 17:46:32

M 1234 COMPLD

;


Using ANDA WebViewto Manage the

UAP

This chapter tells you how to use ANDA WebView to manage the UAP. It contains the following sections:

◆ Logging on to ANDA WebView

◆ Navigating the WebView Interface

◆ WebView Quick Reference Table

◆ Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView

◆ Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView

◆ Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA WebView

◆ Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView

◆ Configuring Clocking Using ANDA WebView

◆ Provisioning Data Transmission Using ANDA WebView

◆ Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView

◆ Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView

◆ Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView

◆ Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Logging on to ANDA WebView


Logging on to ANDA WebView

To log on to ANDA WebView, follow these steps:

1. Connect a workstation to the UAP in one of these ways:

◆ Over an analog modem to the corporate LAN where the UAP is installed

◆ Directly to the corporate LAN where the UAP is installed

2. Launch one of the following web browsers:

◆ Internet Explorer, version 4.x or higher

◆ Netscape Communicator, version 4.5 or higher

ANDA WebView is installed on the UAP CPU module. You do not have to install any software on your workstation in order to run WebView.

3. From your web browser, enter the following Internet address to open the WebView logon page, shown in Figure 35:

http://<ip address>/

where <ip address> is the IP address that you configured for the active CPU. For details about configuring the IP address, see “Step 7: Establish Ethernet Connectivity” in Chapter 2.

Figure 35 ANDA WebView Logon Page

Logging on to ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


In a redundant CPU configuration, each CPU module has a different IP address. To run WebView successfully you must enter the IP address of the active CPU. To verify that you are running WebView via the active CPU module, click System/Database Status in the sidebar menu to open the System/Database Status page. If you have accessed WebView via the standby CPU module, this page displays an error message to that effect; restart the session with the IP address of the other (active) CPU module.

4. On the logon page, enter the following:

◆ In the User Name field, enter admin

◆ In the Password field, enter password#1

You should change the default password as soon as possible to increase security. For details about how to set up user accounts and change and assign passwords using ANDA WebView, see “Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView” later in this chapter.

5. Click Log in to open the Chassis View page, shown in Figure 36.

Figure 36 ANDA WebView Chassis View Page (top portion)

As shown in Figure 36, the top portion of the Chassis View page displays system information and alarms counts and a graphical representation of the physically installed card in the UAP chassis.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Logging on to ANDA WebView


Scroll down on the Chassis View page to see the Slot Assignment section— a graphical representation of the logically assigned cards in the UAP chassis, as shown in Figure 37.

Figure 37 ANDA WebView Chassis View page (bottom portion)

From the Chassis View page:

◆ Click the Edit (pencil) icon in the upper left of the page to edit system information (name, time, and date).

◆ Click a slot on the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page to open the provisioning page for the type of card assigned to that slot.

◆ Click a slot on the Slot Assignment graphic at the bottom of the page to open the Board Assignment page for that slot, from which you can logically assign cards to the slot.

◆ Click links in the sidebar menu to open pages pertaining to other types of configuration and management.

Navigating the WebView Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Navigating the WebView Interface

Figure 38 shows the Provision DS1 Facility page that opens when you click a slot assigned to a DS1 card on the Chassis View.

Figure 38 ANDA WebView Provision DS1 Facility Page

As shown in Figure 38, WebView pages are divided into two panes:

◆ The sidebar menu on the left provides links to pages from which you can perform specific types of configuration and management:

Chassis View — View system information, graphical representations of and physical and logical slot assignments; assign cards to slots; and provision facilities.

System/Database Status — View system and database information.

User Account — Add and delete user accounts and set and change passwords.

Alarms — Manage system alarms.

Clock — Configure system clocking.

IDLC — Provision IDLC groups.

Cross Connection — Provision cross connections.

Persistence Data — Save provisioned data in the database.

Facility Protection — Configure protection switching.

◆ The summary configuration pane on the right displays the current settings for the selected category of provisioning.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Navigating the WebView Interface


In general you navigate the ANDA WebView interface as follows:

◆ Click slots on the Chassis View page to open facility provisioning and board assignment pages.

◆ Click links on the sidebar menu to open configuration pages pertaining to specific types of provisioning.

◆ Click Edit (pencil), View (magnifying glass), and Delete (trash can) icons to edit parameters, open related configuration pages, and delete provisioning. For details see “Using Standard WebView Features” later in this section.

◆ Click tabs (when available) to open related configuration pages.

Using Standard WebView FeaturesThis section describes the features common to most WebView pages.

Edit (pencil) IconClick the Edit (pencil) icon to open a page that allows you enter or change configuration parameters for a specific entity, such as an individual slot, port, or channel.

For example, from the Provision DS1 Facility page shown earlier in Figure 38, click the Edit icon in the row corresponding to the port you want to provision to open the Edit DS1 Parameters page, shown in Figure 39.

Figure 39 ANDA WebView Edit DS1 Parameters Page

Navigating the WebView Interface 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


View (magnifying glass) IconClick the View (magnifying glass) icon to open a page that displays configuration information on a more detailed level. In most cases, you can click the Edit (pencil) icon from this page to open a page that allows you to enter or change these settings.

For example, from the Provision Facility page shown earlier in Figure 38, click the View icon to open the Provision DS0 Facility page, shown in Figure 40. From this page, you can then click the Edit icon to configure individual DS0s for the selected port.


Delete (trash can) IconClick the Delete (trash can) icon to delete the corresponding line item in the displayed table. For example, on the Provision DS0 page shown above in Figure 40, click the Delete icon in the appropriate row to delete the corresponding DS0 channel. When you click the Delete icon, a confirmation page appears. Click Yes to perform the specified delete operation.

TabsClick tabs to display related configuration pages. For example, on the Provision DS1 Facility page shown earlier in Figure 38, click the PM tab to open the DS1 Performance Monitoring page, click the Inventory tab to open the Board Summary page, or click the Loopback tab to open the DS1 Loopback page.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Navigating the WebView Interface


Save and Cancel Buttons

Pages on which you change parameters include Save and Cancel buttons.

◆ Click Save to save your changes and return to the previous page.

Do not confuse the Save button on configuration pages with the Save button on the Persistent Data Maintenance menu. When you click Save on an ANDA WebView configuration page, you save data in flash memory only. This process is fast. When you click Save on the Persistent Data Maintenance menu, you save data in the persistent data base. This process can take up to 10 minutes.

◆ Click Cancel to leave the settings unchanged.

To save your settings in the persistent database, you must click Persistent Data under the Provision sidebar menu heading to open the Persistent Data Maintenance menu, then click Save.

Logging Out

When you are done using WebView, click Log Out on the sidebar menu. You are returned to the Logon page, from which you can either log back on or close the browser window.

IMPORTANT: For security, we advise that you close the browser window when you are done using ANDA WebView. Since all viewed pages are saved in the cache, you may also want to clear the cache. This prevents others from accessing ANDA WebView using your logon name.

WebView Quick Reference Table 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


WebView Quick Reference Table

Table 24 outlines the basic steps you follow to perform configuration and management tasks using ANDA WebView. For detailed instructions see the sections following the table.

IMPORTANT: Each time you complete a section of provisioning—after you have provisioned your DS1 facilities, for example—save the provisioned data in the persistent data base. To do this, click Persistent Data on the sidebar menu to open the Persistent Data Maintenance page, then click Save. It takes about 10 minutes to complete the save operation.

Table 24 Using ANDA WebView to Configure the UAP—Overview of Tasks

Task Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Change the default password

Click User Account to open User Account page.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to User #1 (the default administrator under which you log on initially) to open Edit User Account page.

Enter new Password and Confirm Password.

Click Save.

Set up user accounts Click User Account to open User Account page.

To view list of user group access privileges, click Group column heading.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to User # you want to set up to open Edit User Account page.

Enter User Name, select access Group, and enter and confirm Password.

A list of user group access privileges appears at the bottom of the Edit User Account page for your reference.

Click Save.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set up additional user accounts as desired.

Delete user accounts Click User Account to open User Account page.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to user account you want to delete to open confirmation page.

Click Yes to delete specified user account.

Assign cards to slots Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page.

On Slot Assignment graphic at bottom of page, click slot to which you want to assign board to open Board Assignment page.

Assign card type as desired.

Click Save.

Configure system information (name, date, and time)

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in upper left to open Edit System Parameters page.

Edit system information as desired.

Click Save.

(continued)

View CPU (active and standby) and database status

Click System/Database Status to open System/Database Status page.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 WebView Quick Reference Table


View card information, including running image, SSN, CLEI, SLN, software version, boot version, and FPGA version.


On Chassis View graphic at top of page, click slot for which you want to view information to open Provision DS1 Facility page.

Click Inventory tab to view Board Summary page for selected slot.

Provision IDLCs (Do not create CRVs during this process)

Click IDLC to open Provision IDLC page.

Select IG # (1-3), then click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to DTF you want to provision.

Assign slot and port to DTF and put DTF in or out of service as desired.

Click Save.

View IDLC protection groups

Click IDLC to open Provision IDLC page.

Click Protection Group tab to view primary and secondary EOC and TMC protection groups for all IGs.

View CRV list Click IDLC to open Provision IDLC page.

Click CRV List tab to view list of assigned CRVs. This list is for informational purposes only; you do not create CRVs from the Provision IDLC page.

View IG map Click IDLC to open Provision IDLC page.

Click IG Map tab to view lG/CRV assignments for all ports and channels on the slot.

Configure clocking Click Clock to open Provision Clock page, then click Edit (pencil) icon to open Edit Reference Timer page.

Select Slot# and Port # you want to assign as Reference A and Reference B.

If timing for the selected source is taken from card as a whole, rather than from individual port, select Disable as Port #.

Click Save to save your reference clock assignments and return to Provision Clock page.

Select the desired Timing Mode—an ordered list that indicates the priority of the four clock sources (reference A, reference B, network, and internal).

Click Save.

(continued)

Table 24 Using ANDA WebView to Configure the UAP—Overview of Tasks (Cont.)




Provision DS1 facilities Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page.

On Chassis View graphic at top of page, click slot for which you want to provision DS1 facilities to open Provision DS1 Facility page.

You must logically assign a DS1 card to the slot before you can provision it. See “Assign cards to slots” earlier in this table for details.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to DS1 port you want to provision to open Edit DS1 Parameters page.

Edit DS1 port parameters as desired, then click Save.

Use Save multiple check box to assign the same parameters to multiple DS1s at the same time.

Provision DS0s for DS1 ports (create CRVs during this process)

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page, then click slot for which you want to provision DS0 channels to open Provision DS1 Facility page.

Click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to DS1 for which you want to provision DS0s to open Provision DS0 Facility page.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to DS0 you want to provision to open Edit DS0 Parameters page.

Configure DS0 parameters and assign IG and CRVs, then click Save.

Use Save multiple check box to provision a range of channels at the same time; CRVs are automatically incremented by 1, and To Channel field defines the end of the channel range.1

Delete DS1 provisioning Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page.

On Chassis View graphic at top of page, click slot for which you want to delete DS1 facilities to open Provision DS1 Facility page.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to DS1 port for which you want to delete provisioning information to open confirmation page.

Click Yes to delete DS1 parameters on the specified port.

1 We suggest that you check the CRV list (click IDLC, then click the CRV List tab) to be sure that the CRV numbers that will be created automatically using the Save Multiple check box are not already assigned. If you set the range of CRVs to be assigned automatically in such a way that newly-created CRVs will duplicate existing CRV numbers, the duplicate number(s) are not assigned. For example, consider a scenario in which you are using the Save multiple check box to provision a range of 12 channels and you designate 101 as the first CRV number. If no CRVs are assigned in the range 101-112, then all 12 new CRVs will be created. If CRVs 102 and 103 are already assigned, however, new CRVs will not overwrite the existing ones, and only 10 new CRVs will be created.

(continued)

Delete DS0s Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page, then click slot for which you want to delete DS0 channel provisioning to open Provision DS1 Facility page.

Click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to DS1 for which you want to delete DS0s to display Provision DS0 Facility page.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to DS0 channel which you want to delete to open confirmation page.

Click Yes to delete the specified DS0.





Provision DS3 facilities Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page.

On Chassis View graphic at top of page, click slot for which you want to provision DS3 facilities to open Provision DS3 Facility page.

You must logically assign a DS3 card to the slot before you can provision it. See “Assign cards to slots” earlier in this table for details.

In DS3 Facility table, click Edit (pencil) icon to open Edit DS3 Parameters page.

Configure DS3 parameters as desired, then click Save.

Provision DS1 ports (up to 28) for DS3 facilities


On Chassis View graphic at top of page, click slot corresponding to DS3 card for which you want to provision DS1s to open Provision DS3 Facility page.

In DS1 Facility table click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to DS1 you want to provision to open Edit DS1 Parameters page.

Edit DS1 parameters as desired, then click Save.

Use Save multiple check box to assign the same parameters to multiple DS1s at the same time.

Provision DS0s for DS1s assigned to DS3 facilities (create CRVs during this process)

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page, then click slot for which you want to provision DS0 channels to open Provision DS3 Facility page.

In DS1 Facility table, click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to DS1 for which you want to provision DS0s to display Provision DS0 Facility page.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to DS0 you want to provision to open Edit DS0 Parameters page.

Configure DS0 parameters and assign CRV, then click Save.

Use Save multiple check box to provision a range of channels at the same time; CRVs are automatically incremented by 1, and To Channel field defines the end of the channel range2.

2 See note 1 on previous page.

(continued)

Delete DS0s for DS1s assigned to DS3 facilities

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page, then click slot for which you want to delete DS0 channels to open Provision DS3 Facility page.

In DS1 Facility table, click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to DS1 for which you want to delete DS0s to display Provision DS0 Facility page.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to DS0 you want to delete to open configuration page,

Click Yes to delete specified DS0.





Create DS0 cross connections

Click Cross Connection to open Provision Cross Connection page. Use Slot # field to select slot for which you want to view cross connections.

Click Create button to open Create DS0 Cross Connection page.

Select Slot #, Port, and DS0 for the two sides of the cross connection. The payload on the two sides must match.

Click Apply.

Select Connection Type (Voice or Data) and click Save.

Create DS1 cross connections

Click Cross Connection to open Provision Cross Connection page.

Click DS1 tab to display DS1 Cross Connection table. Use Slot # field to select slot for which you want to view cross connections.

Click Create button to open Create DS1 Cross Connection page, then select Slot # and Port for the two sides of the cross connection and click Apply.

Select Connection Type (Voice or Data) and click Save.

Delete DS0 cross connections

Click Cross Connection to open Provision Cross Connection page. Use Slot # field to select slot for which you want to delete DS0 cross connections.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to cross connection you want to delete to open confirmation page.

Click Yes to delete specified cross connection.

Delete DS1 cross connections

Click Cross Connection to open Provision Cross Connection page.

Click DS1 tab to display DS1 Cross Connection table. Use Slot # field to select slot for which you want to delete DS1 cross connections.

Click Delete (trash can) icon in row corresponding to cross connection you want to delete to open confirmation page.

Click Yes to delete specified cross connection.

(continued)

Configure DS1 protection switching (1:4 or 1:8 DS1 protection switch)

Click Facility Protection to open Facility Protection page, then click Configuration tab.

In Configure DS1 Protection Box section, identify DS1 protection switch by selecting DS1 Protection Box #.

Enter slot numbers of UAP cards you want to protect with specified DS1 protection switch (box) in Input Port fields (#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, and #8. These are the cards you will connect physically to the OUT ports on the DS1 protection switch.

Enter slot number of UAP card you want to use to provide protection in Spare Port field. This is the card you will connect physically to the SPARE port on the DS1 protection switch.

Click Apply.

Perform manual DS1 protection switchovers and restores

Click Facility Protection to open Facility Protection page.

To perform manual switchover, select slot number of card which you want to switch to the spare from Switch to Spare Slot list, then click Switch Over.

To perform manual restore, select slot number of protected card you want to restore from Restore Protected Board Slot list, then click Restore.





Configure DS3 protection switching

Click Facility Protection to open Facility Protection page, then click Configuration tab.

Scroll down to Configure 1 Plus 1 Switch section and select Slot # of DS3 module for which you want to provide protection.

In Spare Port field, enter slot number of the DS3 module which you want to use to provide protection.

Click Apply.

View alarms Click Alarms to open Alarms page. Alarm Summary lists total number of Critical, Major, Minor, and Miscellaneous alarms for entire chassis. Table lists active and history alarms by Slot #.

Display is updated automatically.

Click alarm count for desired type of alarm (Critical, Major, Minor, or Miscellaneous) to view summary of active alarms of that type.

Click alarm count (active or history) for desired slot to view summary of active or history alarms on that slot.

Configure external alarms

Click Alarms to open Alarms page, then click External Alarm tab to display table of external alarm configurations.

Click Edit (pencil) icon in row corresponding to alarm input you want to configure to open Edit External Alarm page.

Select the external alarm Type and set the alarm State (Enable or Disable the alarm).

Click Save.

(continued)

Enable and disable fan and power supply alarms

Click Alarms to open Alarms page, then click Fan/Power tab to display tables of fan tray and power supply alarms.

To enable or disable fan tray alarm for all three fan units, click Enable or Disable in Action column of Fan Tray Alarm table.

To enable or disable alarm for power supply A or power supply B, click Enable A or Disable A (Enable B or Disable B for power supply B) in Action column of Power Supply Alarm table.

Monitor DS1 performance

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page and click slot for which you want to view DS1 performance statistics.

Click PM tab to open DS1 Performance Monitoring page and select Port # for which you want to view performance statistics.

Click Get to retrieve current statistics and Reset to reset statistics.

To view a 24-hour table of error counts, broken down into 96 15-minute intervals, for a particular statistic, click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to desired statistic.

If desired, use Port # field to select another port for which to view statistics.





Monitor DS3 performance

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page and click slot for which you want to view DS3 performance statistics.

Click PM tab to open DS3 Performance Monitoring page.

Click Get to retrieve current statistics and Reset to reset statistics.

To view a 24-hour table of error counts, broken down into 96 15-minute intervals, for a particular statistic, click View (magnifying glass) icon in row corresponding to desired statistic.

Set DS3 performance monitoring (PM) alert thresholds

Click Chassis View to open Chassis View page, then click slot for which you want to set DS3 performance registers to open Provision DS3 Facility page.

In DS3 Facility table, click View (magnifying glass) icon to open DS3 Performance Alert Thresholds page.

Click Get to get current thresholds, then enter Value(s) in table cell corresponding to PM counter and interval (15 min or 24 hr) you want to set.3

Click Save 15 min to save 15-minute thresholds, Save 24 hr to save 24-hour thresholds, or Save Both to save all thresholds.

Save provisioned data in the persistent database

Click Persistent Data to open the Persistent Data Maintenance page.

Click Save. When you click Save, the System/Database page opens. The Database Status row in the table displays Save in progress until the save is complete.

3 CAUTION: Use extreme care when changing PM thresholds. These values must match your switch maintenance requirement. If you set the thresholds too low, an inordinate number of alarms will be generated. If you set the PM thresholds too high, alarms will not be generated in time for you to correct the problem before the line goes out of service.



975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView


Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView

The UAP Craft interface supports the following classes, or groups, of users:

◆ Administrator — Users in this group can execute all system commands.

◆ Provisioner — Users in this group can execute all system commands, but they cannot change passwords.

◆ Tester — Users in this group can view, but not change, system information, view and reset the performance monitoring registers, configure and switch DS1 protection, view all alarm configurations, and set the ACO.

◆ Monitor — Users in this group cannot perform any provisioning; they have read-only access to system information, provisioning data, and performance monitoring data.

Each group is associated with a set of access privileges. When you set up a user account, you set the access privileges by assigning one of the four groups to the account.

Managing user accounts involves the following tasks:

◆ Changing the default administrator (admin) password

◆ Setting up user accounts

◆ Deleting user accounts

You must be logged on as an administrator to manage user accounts.

The following subsections provide detailed instructions for performing these tasks.

Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Changing the Default PasswordTo change the password for the default administrator user name you used to log on to the UAP initially, follow these steps:

1. Click User Account on the sidebar menu to open the User Account page, shown in Figure 41.

Figure 41 ANDA WebView User Account Page



2. On the User Account page, click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to User #1 (the default administrator under which you logged on initially) to open the Edit User Account page, shown in Figure 42.

Figure 42 ANDA WebView Edit User Account Page

3. Enter the new default Password. The password:



◆ Can contain any of the following characters:(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, !, @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, or ,).



4. Confirm the new password by entering it again in the Confirm Password field.

5. Click Save to save the new default password.

Managing User Accounts Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Adding and Editing User Accounts

The UAP supports up to 15 users; one user account is reserved for the default administrator user name you use to log on to the system initially.

To add and edit user accounts, follow these steps:

1. Click User Account on the sidebar menu to open the User Account page, shown earlier in Figure 41.

2. On the User Account page, click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the User # you want to configure to open the Edit User Account page, shown earlier in Figure 41.

3. Enter or edit the User Name. This name must be unique. It can be up to 24 characters and can contain a blank.

4. Select the Group (Administrator, Provisioner, Tester, or Monitor) to which you want to assign the user name.

To view a table of user group access privileges, click the Group column heading to open the User Group Access Privilege page, shown in Figure 43.

Figure 43 ANDA WebView User Group Access Privilege Page



5. Enter the desired Password.

6. Confirm the password by entering it again in the Confirm Password field.

7. Click Save to save the new or edited User Account.

Deleting User AccountsTo delete a user account, follow these steps:

At least one administrator user account must be defined at all times.

1. Click User Account on the sidebar menu to open the User Account page, shown earlier in Figure 41.

2. On the User Account page, click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the User # you want to delete. A confirmation page opens.

3. Click Yes to delete the specified user account.

Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView

Before you can configure system information and provision IDLC groups and facilities, you must set up an inventory of the cards installed in the shelf. When you set up an inventory, you confirm the physical configuration of your UAP by assigning cards logically to the slots in the shelf.

To assign cards logically to slots, follow these steps:

1. Click Chassis View on the sidebar menu to open the Chassis View page, shown earlier in Figure 36.

2. On the Slot Assignment graphic at the bottom of the Chassis View page, click the slot to which you want to assign a card to open the Board Assignment page, shown in Figure 44. This page lists the cards that are physically installed (Currently Plug In) and logically assigned (Currently Assigned) in the shelf.

Figure 44 ANDA WebView Board Assignment Page

3. In the Change Board Assignment To field, select the card type you want to assign to the slot.

4. Click Save to save your assignment.

5. Repeat steps 2-4 as desired to assign cards to other slots.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA


Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA WebView

The following system information is displayed at the top of the Chassis View page, as shown earlier in Figure 36:

◆ Equipment name

◆ IP address (of the active CPU module)

◆ Date and time

To edit this system information, follow these steps:

You must log on as an administrator to edit system information.


2. On the Chassis View page, click the Edit (pencil) icon to the left of the to system Name to open the Edit System Parameters page, shown in Figure 45.

Figure 45 ANDA WebView Edit System Parameters Page

3. Edit the following system information:

Name — The name which you want to assign to the UAP. The name can be up to 20 characters long, and it can contain alphanumeric and special characters. It is not case sensitive, but it cannot contain spaces.

Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Date — The date, in mm/dd/yyyy fozrmat.

Time — The time, in hh:mm:ss format.

4. Click Save to save your entries.

Viewing CPU and Database Status InformationTo view CPU and database status information:

Click System/Database Status on the sidebar menu to open the System/Database Status page, shown in Figure 46

Figure 46 ANDA WebView System/Database Status Page

The System/Database page lists the following information:

System Board Status — The status of the active CPU module: Active with Standby, Active without Standby, or Standby.

If you have accessed ANDA WebView via the standby CPU module, the System Board Status field displays a message to that effect. Restart the session with the IP address of the active CPU module.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA


Standby System Board Status — The status of the standby CPU module: Ready to Take Over, Not Ready to Take Over, Not Provisioned - Need SAVE.

If the Standby Board Status is listed as Not Provisioned - Need SAVE, click Persistent Data in the sidebar menu to open the Data Maintenance page, then click Save to save provisioned data in the persistent database and to the standby CPU.

Database Status — The status of the database on the standby CPU module: Normal, Save Failed, or Save In Progress.

Database Last Saved — The date and time at which the database was last saved.

Viewing Card InformationIn a troubleshooting situation, you may be asked to provide certain information to your service provider. To view detailed information about a the card installed in a particular slot, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to view card information to open the Provision DS1 Facility menu, shown earlier in Figure 38.

3. Click the Inventory tab to open the Board Summary page, shown in Figure 47.

The Board Summary page lists the following information about the card in the selected slot:

Currently Assigned — The type of card logically assigned to the slot.

Currently Plug In (Installed) — The type of card physically installed in the slot.

Running Image — The software image (A or B) off which the card is currently running.

Image A — The version number of software image A.

Image B — The version number of software image B.

SSN — The series number for the card.

CLEI — The CLEI (Common Language Equipment Identification) code. This is a Bellcore-assigned code used to uniquely identify the card type.

ECI — The ECI number for the card.

Viewing and Configuring System, CPU, and Card Information Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Figure 47 ANDA WebView Board Summary Page

SLN — The serial number for the card. The format is six digits of serial number followed by two characters of board vendor code followed by four digits of manufacture date code. The date code is in the format of two digits representing the year and two digits representing the week of the year. For example, the 22nd week of 1999 would be represented as 9922.

SFT VRSN — The version number of the software currently running on the card.

BOOT VERSN — The version number of the boot ROM.

FPGA VERSN — The version number of the field programmable gate array (FPGA) logic chip.

Man # — The manufacturer’s part number for the card.

Revision — The revision number for the card.

Serial # — The serial number for the card.

Date Code — A code indicating the date the card was manufactured.

Supplier Code — A code indicating the manufacturer of the card.

Product # — The product number for the card.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView


Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView

An IDLC (Integrated Digital Loop Carrier) is a DLC (Digital Loop Carrier) system that has a direct digital interface to the LDS (Local Digital Switch). IDLCs groups (IGs) are the digital transmission groups you can use within the switch. The UAP supports three IGs.

Before you provision facilities and IGs, you should activate the fan alarm. For details, see “Enabling and Disabling Fan and Power Supply Alarms” later in this chapter.

To provision IGs, follow these steps:

1. Click IDLC on the sidebar menu to open the Provision IDLC page, shown in Figure 48.

Figure 48 ANDA WebView Provision IDLC Page

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


2. On the Provision IDLC page, select the IG # that you want to provision.

3. Click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the DTF (digital transmission facility) you want to provision to open the Edit Digital Transmission Facility page, shown in Figure 49.

Figure 49 ANDA WebView Edit Digital Transmission Facility Page

4. On the Edit Digital Transmission Facility page, assign the Slot # and Port # for the DTF and set the Service for the DTF: in service (IS) or out of service (OOS).

The IDLC side and the facility side must be on separate cards.


5. Click Save to save your configuration.

A provisioned digital transmission facility is assigned a service status of IS. If there is no service on the board, however, the system switches the service status to OOS and declares a major alarm. To avoid this, you can manually switch the service status to OOS by setting the Service the Edit Digital Transmission Facility page.

Deleting Digital Transmission FacilitiesTo delete DTFs, follow these steps:



1. Click IDLC on the sidebar menu to open the Provision IDLC page, shown earlier in Figure 48.

2. On the Provision IDLC page, click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DTF (digital transmission facility) you want to delete. A confirmation page opens.

3. Click Yes to delete the specified DTF.

Viewing IDLC Protection GroupsTo view IDLC protection groups, follow these steps:


2. Click the Protection Group tab to display the Protection Group table on the Provision IDLC page, as shown in Figure 50.

Figure 50 Protection Group Table on ANDA WebView Provision IDLC Page

The Protection Group table lists the primary and secondary EOC and TMC protection groups for the three IDLC group.

Viewing the CRV ListTo view the CRV list, follow these steps:

Managing IDLC Groups (IGs) Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02



2. Click the CRV List tab to display the CRV list on the Provision IDLC page, as shown in Figure 51.

You assign CRVs when you provision DS0s—not when you set up IDLC groups. The CRV List is for informational purposes only.

Figure 51 CRV List on ANDA WebView Provision IDLC Page

The CRV List provides the slot number, port number, channel number, and service status (in service (IS) or out of service (OOS) for each of the assigned CRVs, in groups of 100.

◆ To view another 100 CRVs, select the desired range using the Select CRV Range pull-down list. The UAP supports up to 2048 CRVs.

◆ To view CRVs for another IDLC group, select the desired group number from the IG # pull-down list.



Viewing an IG MapTo view an IG map—the IG/CRV assignments for all ports and channels on a slot—follow these steps:


2. Click the IG Map tab to display the IG map on the Provision IDLC page, as shown in Figure 52.

3. Select the Slot # for which you want to view an IG map.

Figure 52 IG Map on ANDA WebView Provision IDLC Page

The IG map lists the IG/CRV assignments for each port and channel on the selected slot.

Configuring Clocking Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Configuring Clocking Using ANDA WebView



◆ Specifying the timing mode: an ordered list that indicates the priority of the clock sources.

To configure the clock for the UAP using ANDA WebView, follow these steps:

1. Click Clock on the sidebar menu to open the Provision Clock page, shown in Figure 53.

Figure 53 ANDA WebView Provision Clock Page

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring Clocking Using ANDA WebView


2. On the Provision Clock page, select the Edit (pencil) icon to open the Edit Reference Timer page, shown in Figure 54.

Figure 54 ANDA WebView Edit Reference Timer Page

3. On the Edit Reference Timer page, define the Reference A and Reference B clocking sources by selecting the desired Slot #, and Port # number.

If you want the timing for the selected source to be taken from the card as a whole rather than from an individual port, select Disable as the Port #.

4. Click Save to save your reference clock assignments and return to the Provision Clock page.

Provisioning Data Transmission Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


5. On the Provision Clock page, shown earlier in Figure 53, select the desired Timing Mode.

AUTO 1 — REFA, REFB, NET, INT

AUTO 2 — REFA, REFB, INT, NET

AUTO 3 — NET REFA, REFB, INT

AUTO 4 — NET, INT, REFA, REFB

The timing mode indicates the priority of the clock sources. For example, a timing mode of REFA, REFB, NET, INT indicates that the UAP will begin by using the clock source designated as reference clock A as its timing source. If reference clock A fails, the UAP will switch over to reference clock B. If reference clock B fails, the UAP will switch over to the network clock, and if the network clock fails, the UAP will switch over to the internal clock.

6. Click Save to save your clocking configuration.

Provisioning Data Transmission Using ANDA WebView

Provisioning data transmission involves the following tasks:

◆ Provisioning DS1 facilities

◆ Provisioning DS0s for DS1 ports (you configure CRVs during this process)

◆ Provisioning DS3 facilities

◆ Provisioning DS1 ports for DS3 facilities

◆ Provisioning DS0s for DS1s assigned to DS3 facilities (you configure CRVs during this process)

Before you provision IGs and facilities, you should activate the fan and power supply alarms. For details, see “Enabling and Disabling Fan and Power Supply Alarms” later in this chapter.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Provisioning Data Transmission Using ANDA WebView


Provisioning DS1 FacilitiesTo provision DS1 facilities, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to provision DS1s to open the Provision DS1 Facility page, shown in Figure 55.

Figure 55 ANDA WebView Provision DS1 Page



3. Click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 port you want to provision to open the Edit DS1 Parameters page, shown in Figure 56.


4. On the Edit DS1 Parameters page, set the following parameters as desired:

Service — Puts the DS1 in service (IS) or out of service (OOS).

Frame — Framing type:

Code — Line coding: AMI, AMIZCS, or B8ZS.

LBO — Line build out: 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-532, or 532-655 feet.

PM — Enable (YES) or disable (NO) performance monitoring.

To assign the same parameters to multiple DS1 ports at the same time, select the Save Multiple check box, then use the To Port field to specify the ending port number in the range of DS1 ports you want to provision.




Deleting DS1 ProvisioningTo delete DS1 provisioning, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to provision DS1s to open the Provision DS1 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 55.

3. Click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 port for which you want to delete provisioning. A confirmation page appears.

4. Click Yes to delete the DS1 provisioning on the specified port.



Provisioning DS0s for DS1 Ports

You assign CRVs when you provision DS0s—not when you set up IDLC groups. The CRV List that you access from the IDLC page is for informational purposes only.

To provision DS0s for DS1 ports, follow these steps:



3. Click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 port for which you want to provision DS0s to open the Provision DS0 Facility page, shown in Figure 57.




4. On the Provision DS0 Facility page, click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the DS0 you want to provision to open the Edit DS0 Parameters page, shown in Figure 58.




Signaling — Signaling type: FXS/LS (FXS loop start), FXS/GS (FXS ground start), FXO/LS (FXO loop start), or FXO/GS (FXO ground start).

RBS — Robbed bit signaling: Transparent, A Rob bit, AB Rob bit, or ABCD Rob bit.


CRV — Assign a CRV (call reference value), the reference number that identifies the phone line to which the switch side line will be connected.

To assign the same parameters to multiple DS0 channels at the same time, select the Save Multiple check box, then use the To Channel field to specify the ending channel number in the range of DS0 channels you want to provision.

When you provision multiple DS0s at the same time, the CRVs are automatically incremented by one. However, we suggest that you check the CRV list (click IDLC, then click the CRV List tab) to be sure that the CRV numbers that will be created automatically using the Save Multiple check box are not already assigned. If you set



the range of CRVs to be assigned automatically in such a way that newly-created CRVs will duplicate existing CRV numbers, the duplicate number(s) are not assigned. For example, consider a scenario in which you are using the Save multiple check box to provision a range of 12 channels and you designate 101 as the first CRV number. If no CRVs are assigned in the range 101-112, then all 12 new CRVs will be created. If CRVs 102 and 103 are already assigned, however, new CRVs will not overwrite the existing ones, and only 10 new CRVs will be created.


Deleting DS0s on DS1 PortsTo delete DS0s on DS1 ports, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to delete DS0s to open the Provision DS1 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 55.

3. Click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 port for which you want to delete DS0s to open the Provision DS0 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 57.

4. On the Provision DS0 Facility page, click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DS0 channel you want to delete. A confirmation page appears.

5. Click Yes to delete the specified DS0.



Provisioning DS3 FacilitiesTo provision DS3 facilities, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to provision DS3s to open the Provision DS3 Facility page, shown in Figure 59.




3. In the DS3 Facility table, click the Edit (pencil) icon to open the Edit DS3 Parameters page, shown in Figure 60.



Circuit Name— Enter the name you want to assign to the DS3 circuit. The default name is Circuit#1.

Line — Line format: C-Bit or M13.

Coding — Framing code: Bipolar or Unipolar.

Cable — Cable length: Normal or Long (over 450 feet).

PM — Disable or Enable performance monitoring. For details about how to set DS3 performance monitoring alert thresholds, see “Provisioning DS1 Ports for DS3 Facilities” later in this section.

Alarm — Disable or Enable alarm generation.

FEAC — Disable or Enable FEAC (far end alarm signal status code) alarms. This parameter is applicable only if you have configured the line as C-Bit.

Loopback — Specify the type of loopback you want to set on the DS3 port: No loopback, Line loopback, or Local loopback.




Provisioning DS1 Ports for DS3 FacilitiesYou can provision up to 28 DS1 ports for each DS3 interface. To provision DS1 ports for DS3 facilities, follow these steps:



3. In the DS1 Facility table, click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 you want to provision to open the Edit (DS3) DS1 Parameters page, shown in Figure 61.

Figure 61 ANDA WebView Edit (DS3) DS1 Parameters Page

4. On the Edit (DS3) DS1 Parameters page, set the following parameters as desired:


Frame — Framing type:




Provisioning DS0s for DS1s Assigned to DS3 Facilities

You assign CRVs when you provision DS0s—not when you set up IDLC groups. The CRV List that you access from the IDLC page is for informational purposes only.

To provision DS0s for DS1 ports assigned to DS3 facilities, follow these steps:



3. In the DS1 Facility table, click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 for which you want to provision DS0s to open the Provision DS0 Facility page shown earlier in Figure 57.

4. On the Provision DS0 Facility page, click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the DS0 you want to provision to open the Edit DS0 Parameters page, shown earlier in Figure 58.



Signaling — Signaling type: FXS/LS (FXS loop start), FXS/GS (FXS ground start), FXO/LS (FXO loop start), or FXO/GS (FXO ground start).

RBS — Robbed bit signaling: Transparent, A Rob bit, AB Rob bit, or ABCD Rob bit.


CRV — Assign a CRV (call reference value), the reference number that identifies the phone line to which the switch side line will be connected.

To assign the same parameters to multiple DS0 channels at the same time, select the Save Multiple check box, then use the To Channel field to specify the ending channel number in the range of DS0 channels you want to provision.



When you provision multiple DS0s at the same time, the CRVs are automatically incremented by one. However, we suggest that you check the CRV list (click IDLC, then click the CRV List tab) to be sure that the CRV numbers that will be created automatically using the Save Multiple check box are not already assigned. If you set the range of CRVs to be assigned automatically in such a way that newly-created CRVs will duplicate existing CRV numbers, the duplicate number(s) are not assigned. For example, consider a scenario in which you are using the Save multiple check box to provision a range of 12 channels and you designate 101 as the first CRV number. If no CRVs are assigned in the range 101-112, then all 12 new CRVs will be created. If CRVs 102 and 103 are already assigned, however, new CRVs will not overwrite the existing ones, and only 10 new CRVs will be created.


Deleting DS0s on DS1 PortsTo delete DS0s on DS1 ports assigned to DS3 facilities, follow these steps:



3. In the DS1 Facility table, click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 for which you want to provision DS0s to open the Provision DS0 Facility page shown earlier in Figure 57.

4. Click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DS0 channel you want to delete. A confirmation page appears.

5. Click Yes to delete the specified DS0.

Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView

You can cross-connect a DS1, a DS3, or group of DS0s from any DS1 or DS3 on the UAP to any other DS1, DS3, or group of DS0s—as long as the payload on both sides matches. The following subsections describe how to provision DS0 and DS1/DS3 cross connections using ANDA WebView.

Creating DS0 Cross ConnectionsTo create DS0 cross connections, follow these steps:

1. Click Cross Connection on the sidebar menu to open the Provision Cross Connection page, shown in Figure 62. The DS0 tab is displayed by default.

Figure 62 ANDA WebView Provision Cross Connection Page (DS0 Tab))

2. On the Provision Cross Connection page, select the Slot # of the card for which you want to create cross connections.

The Slot # you select must correspond to a slot to which a card has been logically assigned. Non-assigned slots do not appear on the pull-down list. For details about how to assign cards to slots, see “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView” earlier in this chapter.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView


3. Click Create to open the Create DS0 Cross Connection page, shown in Figure 63.

Figure 63 ANDA WebView Create DS0 Cross Connection Page

4. Select the Slot #, Port number and DS0 number for the two sides of the connection (From and To).

The payload on both sides of the cross connection must match.

5. Select the connection Type (Voice or Data).

6. Click Save to save the cross connection.

Deleting DS0 Cross ConnectionsTo delete DS0 cross connections, follow these steps:

1. Click Cross Connection on the sidebar menu to open the Provision Cross Connection page, shown earlier in Figure 62. The DS0 tab is displayed by default.

2. On the Provision Cross Connection page, select the Slot # of the card for which you want to delete cross connections.

3. Click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DS0 cross connection you want to delete. A confirmation page opens.

4. Select Yes to delete the specified DS0 cross connection.

Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Creating DS1 Cross ConnectionsTo create DS1 cross connections, follow these steps:

1. Click Cross Connection on the sidebar menu to open the Provision Cross Connection page, shown earlier in Figure 62.

2. On the Provision Cross Connection page, click the DS1 tab to display the DS1 Cross Connection table, shown in Figure 64.

Figure 64 ANDA WebView Provision Cross Connection Page (DS1 Tab))

3. On the Provision Cross Connection page, select the Slot # of the card for which you want to create cross connections.

The Slot # you select must correspond to a slot to which a card has been logically assigned. Non-assigned slots do not appear on the pull-down list. For details about how to assign cards to slots, see “Assigning Cards (Setting up an Inventory) Using ANDA WebView” earlier in this chapter.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Cross Connections Using ANDA WebView


4. Click Create to open the Create DS1 Cross Connection page, shown in Figure 65.

Figure 65 ANDA WebView Create DS1 Cross Connection Page

5. Select the Slot #, and Port for the two sides of the connection (From and To).

The payload on both sides of the cross connection must match.

6. Select the connection Type (Voice or Data).

7. Click Save to save the cross connection.

Deleting DS1 Cross ConnectionsTo delete DS1 cross connections, follow these steps:

1. Click Cross Connection on the sidebar menu to open the Provision Cross Connection page, shown earlier in Figure 62.

2. On the Provision Cross Connection page, click the DS1 tab to display the DS1 Cross Connection table shown earlier in Figure 64.

3. Select the Slot # for which you want to delete cross connections.

4. Click the Delete (trash can) icon in the row corresponding to the DS1 cross connection you want to delete. A confirmation page opens.

Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


5. Select Yes to delete the specified DS1 cross connection.

Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView

The UAP supports two types of protection switching:

◆ 1-to-N DS1 protection switching — via the 1:8 or 1:4 DS1 protection switch

◆ 1-plus-1 DS3 protection switching — via a DS3 Y connector.

This section describes how to use ANDA WebVIew to configure the UAP for these two types of protection switching

Configuring 1-to-N DS1 Protection Switchingwith a Single 1:4 or 1:8 DS1 Protection SwitchTo configure the UAP for 1-to-4 or 1-to-8 DS1 protection switching using a single DS1 protection switch, follow these steps:

1. Click Facility Protection on the sidebar menu to open the Facility Protection page, shown in Figure 66. The Maintenance tab is displayed by default. This tab lists the current protection switching configuration and allows you to switch to a spare card or restore a protected card.

Figure 66 ANDA WebView Facility Protection Page (Maintenance Tab)

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView


2. On the Facility Protection page, click the Configuration tab to display the DS1 protection switching configuration options, as shown in Figure 67. The top of the page lists the UAP slot numbers connected to the DS1 OUT ports on each protection switch. The number 0 indicates that no board has been assigned to that input port. N/A indicates that either the protection switch is a 1:4 rather than a 1:8 box, and that ports 5-8 are not available or that no protection switch with this number has been installed.

Figure 67 ANDA WebView Facility Protection Page (Configuration Tab)

3. In the Configure DS1 Protection Switch section, perform the following configuration.

a. Identify the DS1 protection switch by selecting the DS1 Protection Box #.

b. Enter the slot numbers of the UAP cards you want to protect with the specified DS1 protection switch in the Input Port #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, and #8 fields. These are the cards you will connect physically to OUT ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 on the DS1 protection switch.

c. Enter the slot number of the UAP card you want to use to provide protection in the Spare Port field. This is the card you will connect physically to the SPARE port on the DS1 protection switch.

d. Click Apply to save your configuration.

Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


You can now click the Maintenance tab to verify your configuration on the Facility Protection Maintenance table. This table lists the following information for each UAP application slot:

Switch — An entry in this column indicates that DS1 card in that slot is connected to a DS1 protection switch. For example PBox#1 indicates that the card is connected to DS1 protection switch #1.

Input Port # — If the card in the slot is connected to the DS1 protection switch, this column indicates the protection switch DS1 OUT port to which it is connected: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or SPARE.

Switch Status — Indicates whether or not a card connected to the DS1 protection switch has been switched: No (the card has not been switched) or To <n> (where <n> is the slot number of the card to which the protected card has been switched. Additionally, the entry for the spare board lists Active in this column when a board has switched to the spare.

Configuring 1-plus-1 DS3 Protection SwitchingTo configure the UAP for DS3 protection switching, follow these steps:

1. Click Facility Protection on the sidebar menu to open the Facility Protection page, shown earlier in Figure 66. The Maintenance tab is displayed by default. This tab lists the current protection switching configuration and allows you to switch to a spare card or restore a protected card.

2. On the Facility Protection page, click the Configuration tab to display the DS1 protection switching configuration options, as shown earlier in Figure 67.

3. Scroll down to the Configure 1 Plus 1 Switch section, perform the following configuration.

a. select the Slot # of the DS3 module you want to protect.

b. In the Spare Port field, enter the slot number of the DS3 module for you want to use to provide the protection.

c. Click Apply to save your configuration.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Configuring Protection Switching Using ANDA WebView


Performing Manual Protection Switchovers and RestoresThis section tells you how to manually switch a protected card to the spare and how to manually restore a protected card that has been switched over to the spare.

Performing Manual Protection SwitchoversTo manually switch a protected card to the spare card, follow these steps:

1. Click Facility Protection on the sidebar menu to open the Facility Protection page, shown earlier in Figure 66. The Maintenance tab is displayed by default.

2. From the Switch To Spare Slot selection field, select the slot number of the card you want to switch over to the spare.

3. Click Switch Over to switch from the selected card to the spare.

Performing Manual Protection RestoresTo manually restore a protected card that has been switched over to the spare, follow these steps:

1. Click Facility Protection on the sidebar menu to open the Facility Protection page, shown earlier in Figure 66. The Maintenance tab is displayed by default.

2. From the Restore Protected Board Slot selection field, select the slot number of the card you want to restore.

3. Click Restore to restore the selected card.

Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView

Using ANDA WebView, you can view current and history alarms, enable and disable fan and power supply alarms, and configure external alarms. For details about connecting the alarm contact panel, see “Connecting the Alarm Output Relay Box” in Chapter 2.

Viewing AlarmsTo view system alarms:

Click Alarms on the sidebar menu to open the Alarms page, shown in Figure 68. The Summary tab is displayed by default.

Figure 68 ANDA WebView Alarms Page (Summary Tab)

The Alarm Summary at the top of the page lists the total number of Critical, Major, Minor, and Miscellaneous alarms for the entire UAP chassis.

◆ A critical alarm indicates a problem that requires immediate attention, such as a CPU failure.

◆ A major alarm indicates a problem that affects system transmission service on 24 or more subscriber lines (such as a loss of signal on a T1 port, or a T1 card failure).

◆ A minor alarm indicates a non-service-affecting problem, such as a cooling fan failure.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Managing Alarms Using ANDA WebView


Viewing Active Alarms by Alarm SeverityTo view active alarms by alarm severity;

On the Alarms page (Summary tab), click the alarm count for the desired alarm type. For example, to view a summary of active major alarms, click the number listed for Major Alarms.

Figure 69 shows a representative Active Major Alarm Summary page. The active alarm summary pages for critical, minor, and miscellaneous alarms are similar.

Figure 69 ANDA WebView Active Critical Alarm Summary Page

The Active Alarm Summary pages list the following information for each active alarm of the selected type (critical, major, minor, or miscellaneous) on the entire chassis.

Slot # — The slot number on which the alarm occurred.

Port/Device — The port number or device on which the alarm occurred.

◆ For DS1 cards, the Port/Device is listed as a number (1-12).


◆ For EOC and TMC channels on trunk interface cards, the Port/Device listing includes the channel numbers (for example, DS1- DS0-12)

◆ The Port/Device field can also list devices such as Timing Clock, External Alarm (1-8), or Fan.

Severity — The severity of the alarm: Critical, Major, Minor, or Miscellaneous.



Event — The type of alarm event: Transmission, Environmental (user-defined external alarms), or Equipment. For details about how to define external alarms, see “Configuring External Alarms” later in this chapter.


Viewing Active or History Alarms by Slot NumberTo view active or history alarms for a specific card (by slot number):

On the Alarms page (Summary tab), in the table, click the active or history alarm count for the desired slot number.

Figure 70 shows a representative Board Active Alarm Summary page.

Active alarm data is updated every 30 seconds, and the Board Active Summary page is automatically refreshed.

Figure 70 ANDA WebView Board Active Alarm Summary Page



The Board Active Alarm Summary pages list the following information for each active alarm on the selected card (slot number):











Figure 71 shows a representative Board History Alarm page.

The Board History Alarms page is not automatically refreshed. Reselect the link (the appropriate number in the History Alarms column) on the Alarms page to see a current alarm history table.

Figure 71 ANDA WebView Board History Alarm Page

The Board History Alarm pages list the following information for each history alarm on the selected card (slot number).

Date — The date on which the alarm occurred.

Time — The time on which the alarm occurred.











Enabling and Disabling Fan and Power Supply AlarmsEnable the fan and power supply alarms to direct the system to generate audible alarms in the event of a fan or power supply failure. Disable the fan and power supply alarms to direct the system not to generate alarms in the event of a fan or power supply failure. We recommend that you enable the fan and power supply alarms.

To enable fan and power supply alarms, follow these steps:

1. Click Alarms on the sidebar menu to open the Alarms page, shown in earlier in Figure 68.

2. On the Alarms page, click the Fan/Power tab to display the Fan Tray Alarm and Power Supply alarm tables, shown in Figure 72.

Figure 72 ANDA WebView Alarms Page (Fan/Power Tab)



3. Enable or disable fan or power supply alarms.

◆ To enable or disable the audible alarm for the entire fan tray, click Enable or Disable in the Action column of the Fan Tray Alarm table.

◆ To enable or disable the audible alarm for power supply A, click Enable A or Disable A in the Action column of the Power Supply Alarm table.

◆ To enable or disable the audible alarm for power supply B, click Enable B or Disable B in the Action column of the Power Supply Alarm table.

Configuring External Alarms

To configure external alarms, follow these steps:

1. Click Alarms on the sidebar menu to open the Alarms page, shown earlier in Figure 68.

2. On the Alarms page, click the External Alarm tab to display the External Alarm Configuration table, shown in Figure 73. This table lists the currently-configured external alarms. You can configure up to eight external alarms.

Figure 73 ANDA WebView Alarms Page (External Alarm Tab)



3. Click the Edit (pencil) icon in the row corresponding to the external alarm you want to configure to open the Edit External Alarm page, shown in Figure 74.

Figure 74 ANDA WebView Edit External Alarm Page

4. Select the external alarm Type.

5. Set the external alarm State (Enable or Disable the alarm).


Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView

This section tells you how to monitor DS1 and DS3 link performance using ANDA WebView.

Monitoring DS1 Link PerformanceTo monitor DS1 link performance at the port level, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to view DS1 performance statistics to open the Provision DS1 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 55.

3. Click the PM tab to open the DS1 Performance Monitoring page, shown in Figure 75.

Figure 75 ANDA WebView DS1 Performance Monitoring Page

4. Select the Port # for which you want to view statistics.

5. Click Get to retrieve the current statistics.

To clear the statistics, click Reset.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Monitoring Performance Using ANDA WebView


The DS1 Performance Monitoring page lists current error counts. To view a 24-hour table of a particular error count, click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the desired error count to open a detail page.

Figure 76 shows the detail page for the ES-P (P-bit errored seconds) count.

Figure 76 ANDA WebView DS1 Performance Monitoring Detail Page

The DS1 Performance Monitoring detail page lists the selected error count for the past 24 hours, broken down into 96 15-minute intervals.



Monitoring DS3 Link PerformanceTo monitor DS1 link performance at the card level, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to view DS3 performance statistics to open the Provision DS3 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 59.

3. Click the PM tab to open the DS3 Performance Monitoring page. This page is similar to the DS1 Performance Monitoring page, shown earlier in Figure 75.

4. Click Get to retrieve the current statistics.

To clear the statistics, click Reset.

The DS3 Performance Monitoring page lists current error counts. To view a 24-hour table of a particular error count, click the View (magnifying glass) icon in the row corresponding to the desired error count to open a detail page. The DS3 Performance Monitoring detail page is similar to the detail page for DS1 performance monitoring, shown earlier in Figure 76

For details about setting thresholds for the DS3 error counts, see “Provisioning DS1 Ports for DS3 Facilities” earlier in this chapter.

Setting DS3 Performance Monitoring Alert ThresholdsTo set DS3 performance monitoring thresholds, follow these steps:


2. On the Chassis View graphic at the top of the page, click the slot for which you want to set performance thresholds to open the Provision DS3 Facility page, shown earlier in Figure 59.



3. In the DS3 Facility table, click the View (magnifying glass) icon to open the DS3 Performance Alert Thresholds page, shown in Figure 77.

Figure 77 ANDA WebView DS3 Performance Alert Thresholds Page

4. Click Get to retrieve the current thresholds.

5. Enter the desired threshold(s) in the Value table cell(s) corresponding to the performance monitoring counter and interval for which you want to set a threshold.

CAUTION: Use extreme care when changing DS3 performance monitoring thresholds. These values must match your switch maintenance requirement. If you set the thresholds too low, an inordinate number of alarms will be generated. If you set the thresholds too high, alarms will not be generated in time for you to correct the problem before the line goes out of service.



You can set thresholds for the following performance monitoring counters:

PCV — The number of P-bit coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

PES — The number of P-bit error seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

PSES — The number of P-bit severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CCV — The number of C-bit coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CES — The number of C-bit errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

CSES — The number of C-bit severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LCV — The number of line coding violations encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LES — The number of line errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LSES — The number of line severely-errored seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

SEFS — The number of severely-errored framing seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

AISS — The number alarm indication signal seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

UAS — The number of unavailable seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

LOFS — The number of loss of frame seconds encountered by the DS3 interface in the current 15-minute or 24-hour interval.

6. Click Save 15 min to save 15-minute thresholds, Save 24 hr to save 24-hour thresholds, or Save Both to save thresholds for both 15-minute and 24-hour intervals.




A TROUBLESHOOTING ANDTECHNICAL SUPPORT

This appendix outlines a course of action to take when you encounter problems with UAP plug-in modules and tells you how to obtain technical support from ADC. It contains the following sections:

◆ Troubleshooting Problems with Plug-in Modules

◆ Where to go for Additional Information

Troubleshooting Problems with Plug-in Modules

If you encounter a problem with a plug-in module (CPU card, DS1 line card, or DS3 module), follow this basic progression until you solve the problem:

1. Use the front panel LEDs to pinpoint the problem. For detailed descriptions of the LEDs, see “Verifying Front Panel LEDs” in Chapter 2.

2. Use one of the management interfaces (Craft, TL1, or ANDA WebView) to verify configuration, alarms, and loopback status.

3. Use the TL1 interface to verify configuration, alarms, and loopback status.

4. Contact PairGain for technical support.

Where to go for Additional Information

PairGain Customer Service Group provides expert pre-sales and post-sales support and training for all its products.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Technical Support


Technical Support Technical assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week by contacting PairGain Customer Service Group at:

During normal business hours (7:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays), technical assistance calls are normally answered directly by a Customer Service Engineer. At other times, a request for technical assistance is handled by an on-duty Customer Service Engineer through a callback process. This process normally results in a callback within 30 minutes of initiating the request.

Limited Warranty ADC DSL Systems, Inc. ("ADC") warrants that, for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of shipment, the hardware portion of its products will be free of material defects and faulty workmanship, under normal use. ADC’s obligation, under this warranty, is limited to replacing or repairing, at ADC’s option, any such hardware product which is returned during the 12-month warranty period per ADC’s instructions and which product is confirmed by ADC not to comply with the foregoing warranty.

ADC warrants that, for a period of 90 days from the date of purchase, the software furnished with its products will operate substantially in accordance with the ADC published specifications and documentation for such software. ADC’s entire liability for software that does not comply with the foregoing warranty and is reported to ADC during the 90-day warranty period is, at ADC’s option, either (a) return of the price paid or (b) repair or replace of the software. [ADC also warrants that, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase, the media on which software is stored will be free from material defects under normal use. ADC will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to ADC during the 30-day warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment.]

The transportation charges for shipment of returned products to ADC will be prepaid by the Buyer. ADC will pay transportation charges for shipment of replacement products to Buyer, unless no trouble is found (NTF), in which case the Buyer will pay transportation charges.

ADC may use reconditioned parts for such repair or replacement. This warranty does not apply to any product which has been repaired, worked upon, or altered by persons not authorized by ADC or in ADC’s sole judgment has subjected to misuse, accident, fire or other casualty, or operation beyond its design range.

Repaired products have a 90-day warranty, or until the end of the original warranty period-whichever period is greater.

Telephone: 800.638.0031 or 714.730.3222 The 800 telephone support line is toll-free in the U.S. and Canada.

Fax: 714.832.9924

Email: [email protected]

Advance Replacement 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


ADC DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO ITS PRODUCTS AND ANY ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS. FURTHER, ADC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT SOFTWARE WILL BE FREE FROM BUGS OR THAT ITS USE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR REGARDING THE USE, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE, OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE.

Advance Replacement

Any product determined by PairGain not to comply with the applicable warranty within 30 calendar days from the date of shipment to the Buyer, or as otherwise authorized, are eligible for advance replacement free of charge. A replacement product will be shipped to the Buyer within 24 hours of PairGain’s receipt of notification from the Buyer.

If products returned to PairGain for advance replacement are not received by PairGain within 30 calendar days of shipment of the replacement product or if no trouble is found (NTF) as determined by PairGain, the Buyer will be responsible for payment of the cost of the replacement product.

Billing PairGain’s repair of products returned for repair, replacement, or credit, whether in warranty or out of warranty, which are found to be damaged due to customer negligence or which have had parts removed will be billed at prevailing time and material rates.

In the event that the returned equipment is not covered by warranty, PairGain will contact the customer with estimated repair or replacement charges and obtain customer disposition of the product if a purchase order has not been provided.

Equipment returned for repair or replacement is subject to a $250 per unit no trouble found (NTF) charge in the event that diagnostic evaluation reveals no evidence of functional failure or physical defects.

World Wide Web PairGain product and company information can be found at http://www.adc.com using any Web browser. To download ADC product manuals from the Customer Site portion of the ADC Web page, you need to provide a customer password. If you do not have a password, contact your ADC sales representative.

Returns To return equipment to PairGain:

1 Locate the number of the purchase order under which the equipment was purchased. To obtain a return authorization number, you need to provide the original purchase order number to PairGain’s Return Material Authorization (RMA) Department.

2 Call or write PairGain’s RMA Department to ask for an RMA number and any additional instructions. Use the telephone number, fax number or email address listed below:

• Telephone: 800.370.9670

• Fax: 714.832.9923

• Email Address: [email protected]

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 FCC Compliance


3 Include the following information, in writing, along with the equipment you are returning:

• Company name and address.

• Contact name and telephone number.

• The shipping address to which PairGain should return the repaired equipment.

• The original purchase order number.

• A description of the equipment that includes the model and part number of each unit being returned, as well as the number of units that you are returning.

• The reason for the return. For example:

– The equipment needs an ECO/ECN upgrade.

– The equipment is defective.

If there is another reason for returning the equipment, please let us know so we can determine how best to help you.

4 Pack the equipment in a shipping carton.

5 Write PairGain’s address and the RMA Number you received from the RMA Department clearly on the outside of the carton and return to:

PairGain Technologies, Inc.14352 Franklin Ave.Tustin, CA 92780-7013

Attention: RMA (Number)

FCC Compliance This unit is designed to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the situation by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.

If the equipment is defective, please tell us what you observed just before the equipment malfunctioned. Be as detailed in your description as possible.

All shipments are to be returned prepaid. PairGain will not accept any collect shipments.

Modifications 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by PairGain Technologies, Inc. voids the user’s warranty.

All wiring external to the product(s) should follow the provisions of the current edition of the National Electrical Code.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Modifications



B MAINTAINING THEUAP

This appendix tells you how to perform standard UAP maintenance procedures. It contains the following sections:

◆ Installation and Replacement Considerations

◆ Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database

◆ Performing Downloads and Uploads

◆ Managing CPU Redundancy

◆ Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database

◆ Replacing the Fan Tray

◆ Replacing the Air Filter

Installation and Replacement Considerations

The UAP design enables you to install and replace most modules without powering down the unit. However, you may want to power down the UAP as a precautionary measure if it is not currently in an active state.

CAUTION: Never attempt to remove or install modules without using appropriate static guard measures.

CAUTION: Never attempt to repair parts or modules yourself. Return all defective modules to ADC for repair. Only ADC-trained service representatives are authorized to service parts.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database


Cleaning up a Corrupted Persistent Database

Due to certain actions—not waiting long enough after replacing a CPU card, for example—the persistent database may become corrupted. In these cases, you must clean up the corrupted database by erasing it and rebuilding all network configurations.

To clean up a corrupted persistent database, follow these steps:

1. Create a text file called cleanup.txt. You do not need to type a message in this file; it is a dummy file.

2. Establish an Ethernet connection between the UAP and your PC. For details about making Ethernet connections, see “Ethernet Connectivity Issues for Host Software Release 1.0.0” in Chapter 2.

If the active system module is installed in slot 11, you must connect to the primary Ethernet port. If the active system module is installed in slot 12, you must connect to the secondary Ethernet port.

You must change the IP address on the standby CPU. Using the same IP address for both the active and the standby CPU will cause collisions in CPU actions and may remove the standby card.

3. Ping the UAP to ensure connectivity.

4. TFTP the following message:

tftp -i <ip address> put <directory> cleanup.txt net:/t/erase

where <ip address> is the IP address of the active CPU module and <directory> is the location of the file.

5. Perform step 4 twice on each CPU module so the UAP will toggle between image file A and image file B.

6. Remove the standby CPU module.

7. Recreate your inventory, DS1 and DS0 facilities with CRVs, and IDLC (data transmission facilities) in the active CPU module. For details about how to perform these operations, see the relevant sections in Chapter 4 (Craft interface), Chapter 5 (TL1 interface), and Chapter 6 (ANDA WebView).

8. Save the provisioned data (enter save provisioned data from the Craft Interface Provision menu) in the persistent database on the active CPU. When the data is saved, a Flash Memory Completed message appears on the screen.

9. Wait approximately 10 minutes after the Flash Memory Completed message appears before proceeding to step 10.

Performing Downloads and Uploads 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


10. Re-insert the standby CPU module.

11. Wait approximately 10 minutes, then cause a revertive switch to the standby CPU by either removing the active CPU module or rebooting. The standby CPU takes over for the active CPU.

12. Re-insert the active CPU module.

13. Wait approximately 10 minutes, then reboot to revert to the active CPU.

Performing Downloads and Uploads

This section describes how to download upgrades to the UAP CPU and application modules and how to upload the persistent database.

You download and upload upgrades to the UAP CPU and application modules by transmitting the upgrade files individually via TFTP, waiting after each transmission for the UAP to return a checksum via the Craft interface.

It is imperative that you observe the appropriate wait times when downloading upgrades. The UAP must process a great deal of information and therefore requires a wait of approximately 10 minutes after it receives each checksum or message.

Table 25 provides a quick reference to the download and upload commands. The following subsections provide step-by-step instructions performing downloads and uploads.

Table 25 TFTP Download and Upload Quick Reference

Operation TFTP Command

Download to CPU module

tftp -i <IP address> put <filename> sys:/a/ <software revision>

Download to DS1 module

tftp -i <IP address> put <filename> t1:/<slot #>/[t]/<software revision>

Upload from UAP provisioned data

tftp -i <ip address> get net:/[a,b,t]/net.dat

Erase persistent database

tftp -i <ip address> put <directory> cleanup.txt net:/[t]/erase

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Performing Downloads and Uploads


Downloading Upgrades to CPU and Application Modules

To download an upgrade to a CPU or application module, follow these steps:

1. Call ADC and obtain a user login and password for TFTP downloads.

2. Log on to the Internet and go to the Tech Support page on the ADC website.

3. Select the appropriate product category and download file from the pull-down menus.

4. In the appropriate fields, enter the user login and password that you obtained in step 1.

5. Click Download to download the file to your PC.


tftp -i <IP address> put <filename>

where <ip address> is the IP address of the module to which you are downloading and <filename > is the name of the file you downloaded in step 5.

7. TFTP one of the following messages:

To download system code to a CPU module:sys:/a <software revision>

(then repeat with sys:/b <software revision>)where <software revision> is the system code revision number.

To download DS1 code to DS1 modules:t1:/<slot #>/a/<software revision>

(then repeat with t1:/<slot #>/b/<software revision>)

where <slot#> is the UAP slot number to which you want to download and <software revision> is the DS1 code revision number.

To erase network data from a CPU module:net:/a/erase

(then repeat with net:/b/erase)

8. Wait for the checksum to be returned in the Craft interface. The returned checksum should match the download checksum. If the numbers do not match, then the database is corrupted. Wait 10 minutes, then attempt the download again.

9. Wait 10 minutes.

10. Reboot.

Traffic is not interrupted until you boot, so wait for the maintenance window described by your company’s procedure.

Managing CPU Redundancy 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Uploading the Persistent DatabaseTo upload the persistent database, follow these steps:


tftp -i <ip address> get net:/[t]/net.dat

where <ip address> is the IP address of the active CPU module and [t] is a variable indicating toggling (t) between the image files (a and b).

2. Save the upload to a known backup directory.

Managing CPU Redundancy

The UAP supports a hot-standby CPU module: if the active CPU fails, the standby CPU takes over control of the system without a loss of service. The standby CPU receives configuration information from the active CPU via a database transfer that occurs between the two units in one of two ways:

◆ Initial bootup — When you insert a standby CPU in the shelf with a currently-active CPU, the CPU database is automatically copied into the standby CPU. This process can take up to 10 minutes. After inserting a standby CPU, wait at 10 minutes before making any changes to the active CPU database or attempting a CPU switchover.

◆ Persistent database save — When you save the persistent database in the active CPU (by entering save provisioned data from the Craft interface Provision menu), the database is saved to the active CPU as well as to the standby CPU; however, these saves occur sequentially. After you receive the indication that the database has been saved on the active CPU, you must wait an additional 10 minutes; otherwise, the database will be corrupted.

It is very important that a complete database transfer occurs between the active CPU and the standby CPU. Database transfer takes up to 10 minutes. If the database transfer between the active CPU and the standby CPU is interrupted, the standby CPU will be corrupted and the card will not function correctly.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Removing and Replacing CPU or Line Cards


Removing and Replacing CPU or Line Cards

You use the same procedure to replace either a CPU card or a line card.

CAUTION: You should not hot swap a CPU card on an operational unit unless a redundant CPU card is installed and active at the time of replacement.

CAUTION: If the UAP is configured with two CPU cards, and you are replacing only one of the CPU cards, the module you replace must be designated as the standby CPU card—not the active CPU card.

To replace a CPU card or line card, follow these steps:

1. Put on an anti-static wrist strap, and plug it into a grounding jack.

2. If the UAP does not contain a standby CPU card, or if you are replacing both the active and the standby CPU cards simultaneously, notify all users of the impending service disruption.

3. Remove the CPU or line card module

a. Loosen the thumbscrews at the top and bottom of the module.

CAUTION: Make sure that both screws have been completely removed from the chassis before you attempt to remove the CPU card or line card.

b. Simultaneously open the top and bottom ejector levers. To open the top lever, pull out and up. To open the bottom lever, pull out and down. Open both levers simultaneously to avoid damage.

CAUTION: Always use the injection/ejection levers (located at the top and bottom of a plug-in module) to inject and eject the module. Never push the module in by applying pressure with your hand on the module faceplate.

c. Carefully slide the card out of the slot and place it into an anti-static container.

CAUTION: Do not force a module into or out of the shelf. If you forcibly insert a module that is not lined up properly on the guides, you risk bending the connectors on the backplane. The middle section of backplane connectors is particularly vulnerable to accidental bending. When inserting a plug-in module, first check to see if the faceplate is lined up with the cutout, make sure the card is seated in the guide channel, then push the card in using the injection levers.

4. If you are replacing a CPU card, wait 10 minutes so the currently-active CPU board can download all of its configuration information to the new board.

IMPORTANT: Always wait 10 minutes after replacing or restoring a CPU board. If you insert the new board too soon, the persistent database will be corrupted and you will have to erase the database and rebuild all network configurations.

Replacing the Fan Tray 975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Do not install the DS1 line cards until you have installed the CPU module. If you are replacing a defective active CPU module, do not remove the DS1 boards; the standby CPU will hold the configuration while you replace the active CPU.

5. Align the replacement card with the card guide and carefully slide it into the slot.

CAUTION: If you are not replacing the unit, reinstall the appropriate slot cover(s) to ensure proper chassis airflow.

6. Simultaneously close the top and bottom ejector levers to install the card in the slot.

7. Secure the module in the chassis by tightening the screws.

CAUTION: Hand tighten the locking screws to secure a module in the shelf—do not use a power screwdriver. Power screwdrivers can break the heads off the locking screws, in which case you will have to use a power tool to back out the broken threads.

8. If necessary, restore power to the UAP.

9. Check the LEDs on the replaced module to verify the operational status of the card. For details about CPU and line card status indicators, see “Verifying Front Panel LEDs” in Chapter 2.

Replacing the Fan Tray

When a fan fails, the Misc LED on the CPU card front panel illuminates and an alarm is reported on the UAP. To replace the fan tray, follow these steps:

1. Loosen the two captive screws on the front of the fan tray.

2. Carefully slide the fan tray out of the fan tray compartment.

CAUTION: Keep your fingers clear of the fan rotary blades until the blades have stopped.

3. Slide the replacement fan tray into the fan tray compartment so that it is flush with the front of the lower card cage.

4. Secure the tray in the chassis by tightening the screws.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02 Replacing the Air Filter


Replacing the Air Filter

The UAP has a replaceable air filter. This filter removes dust from the room—air drawn into the UAP by the fans. To maintain the air filter, you should examine it twice a year (more often in dusty environments) and replace it if it appears dirty.

To perform the air filter maintenance procedure, follow these steps:

CAUTION: You can check the air filter while the UAP is powered up; however, if the chassis is in operation, you must replace the filter or insert a new filter and reinsert the fan tray as quickly as possible to avoid overheating the modules. THE CHASSIS SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED WITHOUT THE FAN TRAY FOR MORE THAN 4 MINUTES.

1. Gather the following tools:

◆ screwdriver

◆ replacement air filter

2. Loosen the two captive screws on the front of the fan tray.

3. Carefully slide the fan tray out of the fan tray compartment.

CAUTION: Keep your fingers clear of the fan rotary blades until the blades have stopped.

4. Remove the air filter from the chassis

5. Visually check the condition of the filter. If the filter appears dirty, worn, or is torn, replace it.

6. Insert the new air filter.

7. Replace the fan tray in the fan tray compartment.

8. Secure the tray in the chassis by tightening the screws.


Glossary

ACO Alarm cutoff.

AIS Alarm Inhibition Signal; a special signal format which inhib-its downstream alarms. Also called a blue alarm. Upon detect-ing a bad incoming signal, the transmission equipment at the end of the maintenance span in which a failure exists gener-ates an AIS. For instance, when a SLIM NOTE detects loss of signal coming from the LDS, it sends the AIS to the RT on the corresponding DS1; and when it detects loss of signal coming from the RT, it sends the AIS to the LDS on the correspond-ing DS1. This causes the equipment receiving AIS to inhibit the generation of a signal failure alarm indication.

On an UAP interface, AIS is a bit stream of ones in every position, including the framing bit, for 1 second. The condi-tion is cleared when a valid signal is received for 1 second.

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion; a method of transmitting digital information electrically where successive marks (ones) are of opposite electrical charge.

ANSI American National Standards Institute; the principle technical standards body in the United States.

API Application Program Interface. A set of primitives used by a software application to access, or interface with, a particular feature or function of a system (for example, a communica-tions interface or a file system interface).

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One; a standard subset of the ISO/CCITT MML standard.

B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


BER Bit Error Rate; the number of bits received in the wrong state over a digital transmission facility, typically expressed as a negative power of ten, where a BER of 10-3 indicates that one bit in a thou-sand is errored. A BER of 10-9 is considered acceptable in most circumstances, while a BER of 10-3 results in an audible degrada-tion of PCM voice traffic.

Blue alarm See AIS.

bps Bits per second; the rate or speed of a digital transmission facility, often used with a prefix: k = kilo or 103, m = mega or 106, g = giga or 109, and t = tera or 1012.

BPV Bipolar Violation; an exception condition on digital transmission facilities using AMI indicating the receipt of two successive marks of the same polarity. Equipment is capable of detecting rates exceeding 10(-4 to -6); an alarm is declared when the rate exceeds the configured threshold.

BRI Basic Rate Interface; an ISDN circuit operating at the “basic” digi-tal interface rate, typically equivalent to 3 DS0s.

CAS Channel Associated Signaling; the framing-based European pseudo-standard for the transmission of telephony signaling infor-mation in a multiplexed digital bitstream. In CAS, the signaling travels along the same path as the voice signal.

CCS Common Channel Signaling; the message-based European pseudo-standard for the transmission of telephony signaling infor-mation in a multiplexed digital bitstream. In CCS, the signaling information is packed in a packet dedicated to a single channel (typically 24).

CID Craft Interface Device; also known as IMT (Installation and Main-tenance Terminal).

CGA Carrier Group Alarm.

CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Services.

CLEI Common Language Equipment Identifier.

CO Central Office; a telephone switching office having local area transport access

codec COder/DECoder; an analog-to-digital converter, typically for video signals.

COT Central Office Termination: the CO feeder head of a DLC link.

CPE Customer Premise Equipment or Customer Provided Equipment.

CPU Central Processing Unit; generally an embedded general purpose microprocessor.

CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check; a standard method for detecting bit errors on digital transmission facilities.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


D4 A class of channel bank products supporting the transport of 48 voice-grade channels over two digroups; also, the associated DS1 framing format used by such channel banks.

DACS Digital Access Cross-connect System.

DDL Derived Data Link: a 2.7 Kbps channel between a HDT and the RT that is used to communicate alarm information. The data link is carried in the signaling framing bits of 24 out of every 72 frames of certain DS1 lines. The data link for an UAP configuration is always carried on the first of the four DS1’s comprising the TR-08 interface.

digroup Another term for a DS1; 24 frame-aligned DS0s multiplexed into a single bitstream.

downstream Generally used to describe the direction of signaling or data flow-ing towards the subscriber side of the system. (See also upstream.)

DLC Digital Loop Carrier.

DS0 A 64 Kbps data channel designed to carry one digitized voice cir-cuit; this is the basic switching unit used in digital telephony. Ana-log voice signals are sampled 8000 times per second (8 Khz), with each sample encoded into an 8-bit byte using PCM, yielding a bit-stream of (8 * 8000) or 64 kbps.

DS1 A North American transmission standard; typically a multiplexed bitstream containing 24 frame-aligned DS0’s. A DS1 exactly fills the payload bandwidth of a T1 digital transmission facility.

DS3 A transmission standard; a 44 Mbps digital signal carried over a T3 digital channel.

DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency; a form of address signaling that produces telephone touch-tones. Each key on the phone pad is associated with both a high- and a low-frequency tone. When you press a key, the switch receives the digit represented by both tones.

ESF Extended Super Frame; a specific protocol for the 4 Kbps data link channel carried by 12 of the framing bits in a 24-frame DS1 super-frame; see also SF and DDL.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


ETSI European Telephony Standards Institute; an international stan-dards body apparently replacing ITU-CCITT as the principal source of telecommunications standards in Europe.

FELP Far End Loop Back. A maintenance signal sent between the HDT and RT to force a DS1 loopback at the far end. Although the HDT is obligated to respond to the loopback request, the RT is not.

FITS Failure in Trillion Seconds.

FRU Field Replaceable Unit; a discrete unit of telecommunications equipment, often a card or module.

glitch A disruption or interruption to the service of any number of cir-cuits that are provisioned in the system, or a corruption of any sort to the data or signaling information passed through the circuits.

HDT Host Digital Terminal; the network element installed in the CO as the feeder end of the distribution network.

IDLC Integrated Digital Loop Carrier; a DLC system having a direct digital interface to the LDS; in North American, a DLC system compliant with GR-303.

IPC Inter-Process Communication. Any of a number of techniques used to communicate between processes in a software system. Techniques include message passing, signals, and shared memory. The system in which processes communicate may be a standalone or distributed system.

ISAP Inter-Service Access Point. An identifier used to uniquely describe the interface between a particular subscriber to an inter-process communications service and the provider of those services.

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network; a telecommunications ser-vice that combines elements of both packet- and circuit-switched services.

ISO International Organization for Standardization; a key international standards body.

ITU International Telecommunication Union, formally called CCITT - Committee Consultatif Internationale Telegraphique et Telepho-nique; an international standards body.

LDE/LDS Local Digital Exchange/Local Digital Switch; the local telephone company digital switching element.

LBO Line Build Out; generally, the technique of altering the electrical characteristics of a digital transmission facility based on the phys-ical distance the signal must be driven to reach the next receiver.

LED Light Emitting Diode. The UAP plug-in modules, alarm/fuse panel, and protection relay box all have one or more LED lamps on the front panel.

LOF Loss of Frame alignment (also called LOFA). See OOF.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


LOS Loss Of Signal or Loss Of Sync; an exception condition on digital facilities indicating the receiver’s inability to achieve bit synchro-nization with the remote transmitter.

For TR-08 feeders, LOS is declared when consecutive zeros are received for more than 150 ms. The condition is cleared when a valid signal is detected for 600 ms.

For D4 and Transparent DS1 feeders, LOS is declared when con-secutive zeros are received for more than 2 seconds. The condition is cleared when a valid signal is detected for 10 seconds.

Minor alarm TR-08 alarm indication signalled across the DDL when a non-ser-vice affecting fault is detected.

Major alarm TR-08 alarm indication signalled across the DDL when there is a loss of service to the subscribers served by a shelf (i.e., a digroup).

Misc alarm TR-08 alarm sent from the HDT to the CO when there is an AC power failure, or some other environmental or external alarm indi-cation detected by the UAP.

MLT Mechanized Loop Test.

MML Man-Machine Language.

NEBS Network Equipment Building System.

NSA Non Service Affecting.

OOF Out Of Frame; an exception condition on digital facilities indicat-ing the receiver’s inability to achieve frame synchronization with the remote transmitter. OOF is declared by the UAP when loss of frame alignment persists for 2-3 seconds. In-frame is declared when a valid signal has been received for 10 seconds. Intermittent loss of frame is integrated with a ratio of between 4 and 6 to 1; this means that during the 2-3 second integration interval (during which time loss of frame alignment occurs whenever 2 out of 4 consecutive framing bits are in error, and frame alignment is restored whenever 10 consecutive framing bits are received cor-rectly), the timer times out 4 to 6 times faster towards the alarm state than towards the non-alarm state.

OS Operations Systems; in telephony, the computer system from which the operation of a telephone network is administered.

PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler (for X.25 networks).

PCM Pulse Code Modulation; a standard method of digitally encoding analog signals into a 64 Kbps bitstream.

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service.

PRI Primary Rate Interface; an ISDN circuit operating at the principle (“primary”) digital carrier rate (1.544 Mbps in North America and Japan, 2.048 Mbps in Europe and Australia).

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network.

RBOC Regional Bell Operating Company.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


RF Radio Frequency; an electromagnetic signal in the radio band.

RPS Remote Power Supply; a power supply that provides power to one or more RTs.

RT Remote Termination; the equipment at the end of a link remote from the HDT.

SF Super Frame; twelve sequential DS1 (193-bit) frames; also, the repeating pattern of the 12 framing bits in the superframe.

Shelf alarm A TR-08 alarm indication used to indicate the loss of operational integrity of the equipment supporting the 24 circuits which com-prise a digroup.

SIS Substitute Indication Signal; a signal sent to the exchange when a facility alarm is detected as a means of providing an urgent level alert (as opposed to AIS, which is detected as a non-urgent alert). The selection of AIS versus SIS is provided via an MML com-mand from the NEM. The SIS pattern is alternating zeros and ones on the trunk.

T1 An ANSI standard for interoffice transmission facilities, describ-ing a baseband, bipolar, return-to-zero signaling system. The T1 bitstream is made up of frames consisting of 24 payload octets and one frame bit, for a total frame size of 193 bits. The bitstream has a frame rate of 8000 frames per second, for a total bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps and a payload bandwidth of 1.536 Mbps.

UDLC Universal Digital Loop Carrier; a DLC system having a mediated digital or analog interface to the LDS; in North American, a DLC system compliant with TR-57.

upstream Generally used to describe the direction of signaling or data flow-ing towards the exchange side of the system. (See also down-stream.)

UVG Universal Voice Grade.

VF Voice Frequency; an analog electrical signal carrying a single tele-phone channel.

Yellow alarm A D4-formatted DS1 alarm indication which means that the far-end has detected a receive DS1 failure; equivalent to a major shelf alarm. A yellow alarm is signalled by forcing the second bit of the PCM words to zero for all DS0 channels associated with the failure.

WDT Watch Dog Timeout. All HDT boards have a hardware watchdog timer that requires periodic resets from the software. If the timer times out, then the board goes into a stop state, the BOARD FAIL LED is lit, and the board is electrically removed from the back-plane.

WEPL Weighted Echo Path Loss.

975-870-200-02, Revision 02


Corporate Office14402 Franklin AvenueTustin, CA 92780

Tel: 714.832.9922Fax: 714.832.9924

For Technical Assistance:800.638.0031